Home

2009 GMC Yukon Owners Manual

1. 7 7 Roadside Assistance Program 7 7 Scheduling Service Appointments 7 10 Courtesy Transportation Program 7 1 Collision Damage Repair sseessssse 7 11 Customer Assistance Information Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Service Publications Ordering Information Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Event Data Recorders OnStar Navigation System Radio Frequency Identification RFID Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to GMC Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member o
2. 2 26 Roadside Assistance Program 7 7 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 32 Roof SUNNOOF e 2 77 Running the Vehicle While Parked 2 47 Safety Belt Reminders ssssessesssss 3 36 Safety Belts Gare OF O 5 109 uarie e 1 53 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 37 Lap Bell eer tee in rete eren ene bpr qu nee ME dee 1 52 Lap Shoulder Belt eeseesessesess 1 45 Safety Belts Are for Everyone 1 32 Use During Pregnancy eene 1 52 Safety Defects Reporting to Canadian Government 7 15 Reporting to General Motors 7 15 Reporting to the U S Government 7 14 Safety Warnings and Symbols sssssss iv Scheduled Maintenance ssseeeuessss 6 4 Additional Required Services sss 6 6 Scheduling Appointments sssssssss 7 10 Seats 60 40 Split Bench Seat ssssssss 1 14 Bucket Seats Rear cccccccaceeeeceeeeeeeaees 1 20 Center Seat cccccccccecee cee aseina eiaa 1 13 Head Restraints esee 1 2 Heated and Cooled Seats 1 8 Heated Seats ccccccccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneaes 1 7 Heated Seats Rear
3. ssuessssss 2 21 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer 2 22 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer OPeraliON e 2 23 Third ROW Seat celere ri EUR 1 27 Throttle Adjustable c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 2 27 Tht Wheel m 3 6 Time Setlilig iiis deese tease Dieter tren ares ue UR Rb on 3 84 Tire Pressure Eight 55 rp Ri 3 43 Ua n R 5 61 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels CICANIAG widezsteshinse e na e a E TE 5 112 Buying New Tires eceseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 78 eur 5 84 Changing a Flat Tire seseesesessssss 5 86 CIC ANING E 5 112 Different Size 0 cc cec eee ee cee eeeeeeec eee eeeeeeeeeees 5 80 If a Tire Goes Flat sese 5 85 Inflation Tire Pressure 5 70 Inspection and Rotation ssssssss 5 76 Installing the Spare Tire ssssssss 5 91 Pressure Monitor Operation 5 73 Pressure Monitor System ssssssss 5 71 Removing the Flat Tire ssssss 5 91 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 87 Tires cont Secondary Latch System sssssss 5 98 Sidewall Labeling ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 5 62 ora EE 5 106 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 102 Terminology and Definitions 5 67 Uniform
4. Vehicle Identification Number VIN Model designation Paint information Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer retailer first Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain the vehicle battery even if the vehicle is not operating The vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 96 Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow etc be sure to get it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories If the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool down period protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information
5. Reach a vehicle speed of 5 mph 8 km h There is a message on the rear vision camera screen that states Check Surroundings for Safety Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of the Screen To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen press the MENU button while the rear vision camera image is on the display Any adjustments made will only affect the rear vision camera screen 9 Brightness Touch the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness of the screen Q Contrast Touch the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the screen Symbols The navigation system may have a feature that lets the driver view symbols on the navigation screen while using the rear vision camera The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist URPA system must not be disabled to use the caution symbols If URPA has been disabled and the symbols have been turned on the Rear Parking Assist Symbols Unavailable error message may display See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 53 The symbols appear when an object has been detected by the URPA system The symbol may cover the object when viewing the navigation screen To turn the symbols on or off 1 Make sure that URPA has not been disabled 2 Shift into P Park 3 Press the MENU hard key to enter the configure menu options then press the MENU hard key repeatedly until Display is selected or touch the Di
6. 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the security light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm While the alarm is set the power door unlock switch will not work If the alarm does not sound when it should but the headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 115 If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer retailer 2 22 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer The PASS Key Ill system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to
7. Notice Ifa label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section Z EJECT or CD Eject Press and release to eject the disc that is currently playing A CD ejecting from a radio with CD and DVD ejects from the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The disc can be removed If the disc is not removed after several seconds the disc automatically pulls back into the player For the Six Disc CD player press and hold for two seconds to eject all discs 4 DVD Eject Press and release to eject the disc that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 3 93 44 Tune Turn to select tracks on the CD that is currently playing K SEEK Pl Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds on the CD have played Press the right arrow to go to t
8. Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 U S plus processing fee Without Portfolio Owner Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 U S plus processing fee 7 15 Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle s performance and how it is driven For example your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance to monitor the
9. Language under DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons earlier in this section for more information AUTO DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select when the vehicle s doors will automatically lock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 11 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings SHIFT OUT OF PARK default The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of P Park AT VEHICLE SPEED The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 75 AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 11 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings
10. OFF None of the doors will automatically unlock DRIVER AT KEY OUT Only the driver s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition DRIVER IN PARK Only the driver s door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park ALL AT KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition ALL IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 76 REMOTE DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Hemote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ONLY The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN ONLY The horn will sound on the second press of the lock b
11. The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block access door is located on the driver side edge of the instrument panel Pull off the cover to access the fuse block 5 115 5 116 Rear Accessory Power Outlet Steering Wheel Controls Backlight Driver Door Module Dome Lamps Driver Side Turn Signal Fuses Usage Driver Side Turn Signal Stoplamp Instrument Panel Back Lighting Passenger Side Turn Signal Stoplamp Passenger Door Module Driver Unlock Power Door Lock 2 Unlock Feature Power Door Lock 2 Lock Feature Stoplamp 20 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist Power Liftgate 21 Power Door Lock 1 Lock Feature 22 Driver Information Center DIC 23 Cooled Seats 25 Driver Seat Module
12. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to N Neutral until it stops and hold it there until the N Neutral light starts blinking This will take at least 10 seconds Then slowly release the dial to the Four Wheel Drive Low position The N Neutral light will come on when the transfer case shift to N Neutral is complete Dapo 7 If the engine is running verify that the transfer case is in N Neutral by shifting the transmission to R Reverse for one second then shift the transmission to D Drive for one second 8 Turn the ignition to ACC ACCESSORY which will turn the engine off 9 Place the transmission shift lever in P Park 10 Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle 11 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF Shifting Out of Neutral To shift out of N Neutral do the following 1 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal 2 Turn the ignition to ON RUN with the engine off and shift the transmission to N Neutral 3 Turn the transfer case dial to the desired transfer case shift position Two Wheel Drive High Four Wheel Drive High AUTO After the transfer case has shifted out of N Neutral the N Neutral light will go out 4 Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging the vehicle always wait
13. ccccccceccceeeeeea ease ene 1 13 Manual Lumbar esee 1 6 Memory Mirrors and Pedals 1 8 Power Lumbar cesses 1 6 Power Seats cssssssse II Heer 1 5 Reclining Seatbacks sseessssss 1 10 Third Row Seat ceessse e 1 27 Secondary Latch System sssssssss 5 98 Securing a Child Restraint Center Front Seat Position 1 77 Rear Seat Position ssseesesusss 1 73 Right Front Seat Position sssssss 1 78 SECUNIY LIJDT EE 3 48 SEMIC C CA 5 8 Accessories and Modifications 5 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Md 5 5 Doing Your Own Work see 5 4 Engine Soon Lamp ssseeses 3 44 Publications Ordering Information 7 15 Scheduling Appointments sess 7 10 Service Parts Identification Label 5 114 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 96 Setting the Clock ssss 3 84 Sheet Metal Damage ssee 5 113 Shifting Out of Palk erasoa rnanan 2 45 shifting Into Park 2 3 etre irsi 2 44 Side Blind Zone Alert eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee tenes 2 55 Signals Turn and Lane Change 3 7 SNOW PION ger 4 40 Spare Tie ensesine na nen E E iaai 5 106 Installing ioi
14. usssss 2 52 Outside Manual Mirrors ssueuesssse 2 49 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 2 50 Outside Power Mirrors eene 2 50 Outside Towing Mirrors c ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 2 49 Pathe Tilt scvetticcsascanccothacemamemtenatuantatancetaas secon 2 51 ilc 3 102 3 107 N Navigation System Privacy ssseessss 7 18 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual sese 3 114 New Vehicle Break In sessuss 2 24 Object Detection Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA 2 55 Odometer sari narsan ninien den inue ER DENM dU 3 36 Odometer Trip ccceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 36 Off Floadi cliers teo Root eek E 4 12 Bunte cc nice 4 12 Bleu c 4 11 Oil ENQING 5 15 Engine Oil Life System 5 18 Pressure Gage 2 10 ceceeeeeeeeee eee eee een eeeeeneenees 3 47 Pressure Light eer eerte ente t 3 48 Older Children Restraints ssseesesee 1 54 Online Owner Center 0ceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 5 OnStar Privacy 2 soccer evertere e Ran 7 18 OnStar System see OnStar Manual 2 64 Operation Universal Home Remote System 2 68 Outlet Adjustment scis risiini siisii iurista 3 31 10 Outlets Accessory POW T erectos bread barum 3 21 Outside Automatic
15. 2 49 Outside Power Mirrors Vehicles with outside power mirrors have the controls on the driver door armrest To adjust each mirror 1 2 3 4 Press A or B to select the driver or passenger side mirror Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to move the mirror to the desired direction Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen Press either A or B again to deselect the mirror The mirrors may also include a memory function that works with the memory seats See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 1 8 for more information 2 50 Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold push the mirror toward the vehicle Push the mirror outward to return to its original position Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors Vehicles with outside power foldaway mirrors have the controls located on the driver door armrest Mirror Adjustment 1 Press C to fold the mirrors out to the driving position 2 Press D to fold the mirrors in to the folded position Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors Reset the power foldaway mirrors if The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding They are accidentally manually folded unfolded The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving speeds Fold and unfo
16. 68 kg for each passenger The total cargo load must not be more than the vehicles CWR Weigh the vehicle with the trailer attached so the GVWR or GAWR are not exceeded If using a weight distributing hitch weigh the vehicle without the spring bars in place The best performance is obtained by correctly spreading out the weight of the load and choosing the correct hitch and trailer brakes For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 4 73 42 NOTES 4 74 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care SEVICE nsina hays aE EEA 5 3 Accessories and Modifications 5 3 California Proposition 65 Warning 5 4 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 Doing Your Own Service Work 5 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the luec 5 5 ilg UE 5 5 Gasoline Octane sss 5 5 Gasoline Specifications ssssssssss 5 6 California Fuel s HH 5 6 penc 5 6 Fuel E85 85 Ethanol ssseseesss 5 7 Fuels in Foreign Countries ssssssss 5 8 Filling the Tank uu E Set Rer ecio iE 5 9 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 5 11 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 12 Hood Release e mean pi reDRdq Rn 5 13 Engine Compartment Overview 5 14 Engine Qil stem E 5 15 Engine Oil Life Syst
17. All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck fluid level after filling 5 123 Engine Specifications Engine __VINCode Spark Plug Gap 8L V8 0 080 in 1 01 mm 5 3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management Automatic 0 040 in 1 01 mm Iron Block 5 3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management 3 Automatic 0 040 in 1 01 mm Aluminum Block 5 3L V8 with Active Fuel 6 0L VE ron Block 01040 n 101 mm 6 0L V8 with Active Fuel Management Y Automatic 0 040 in 1 01 mm Aluminum Block 6 2L V8 Flexible Fuel 5 124 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule sssssssss 6 2 Owner Checks and Services 6 9 aj fero Pres itela pc tie beas 6 2 At Each Fuel Pill 2 6 9 Maintenance Requirements sess 6 2 At Least Once a Month sssessesessse 6 10 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 At Least Once a Year sese 6 10 Using the Maintenance Schedule 6 3 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 13 Scheduled Maintenance ssssessss 6 4 Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 15 Additional Required Services 6 6 Engine Drive Belt Routing 6 16 Maintenance Footnotes seseessse
18. Automatic Level Control Compressor Cooling Fan 1 Heavy Duty Antilock Braking System Cooling Fan 2 Antilock Brake System 1 Stud 2 Trailer Brakes Electric Running Boards Heated Windshield Washer System Transfer Case Stud 1 Trailer Connector Battery Power 71 Power Ligate Module 72 Lef Bussed Electrical Center 64 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1 57 58 59 61 62 63 64 65 67 70 71 72 Relays Usse 5 121 Capacities and Specifications If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 for more information iip Engish Merc For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood See your dealer retailer for more information Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a Cooling System 4 8L V8 5 3L V8 6 0L V8 1500 Series 6 0L V8 2500 Series 6 2L V8 Engine Oil with Filter 5 122 ecd Capacities Gaai English Fuel Tank Regular 26 0 gal Extended 1500 Series 31 5 gal Extended 2500 Series 39 0 gal Transmission Fluid 4L60 E Electronic Transmission 5 0 qt 4 7L 6L80 E Transmission 5 7L 6L90 E Transmission 6 0L Transfer Case Fluid 1 6 qt 1 5L Wheel Nut Torque 140 Ib ft 190 Nem tOil filter should be changed at every oil change
19. Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat Secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat It is also better to secure a forward facing child restraint in a rear seat If you must secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go Q A 1 60 What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs ZN CAUTION To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash infants need
20. If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 for more information If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value there may be a problem with your vehicle If this consistently occurs see your dealer retailer for service 3 56 Trailer Gain and Output On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system the trailer brake display appears in the DIC Press the vehicle information button until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting This setting can be adjusted from 0 0 to 10 0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected To adjust this setting see Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for more information OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected Output is displayed in 0 to 10 bars Dashes may appear in the OUTPUT display See Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for more information Engine Hours Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE HOURS displays This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run Relearn Remote Key This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry RKE
21. It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training If a jack is provided with the vehicle it is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack If a jack is provided with the vehicle only use it for changing a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire sa
22. T 2 This device must accept any interference received This device may not cause interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range try this Checkthe distance The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Checkthe location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Checkthe transmitter s battery See Battery Replacement later in this section e If the transmitter is still not working correctly see your dealer retailer or a qualified technician for Service Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter functions work up to 195 feet 60 m away from the vehicle There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 4 With Remote Start and Power Liftgate
23. ese 3 113 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 138 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2
24. 2 Press the pushbutton located under the desired option 3 Press the MENU button again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out 3 85 Radio s QAM 640 9 38 680 Y 750 Y 96 1 98 5 X41 pr SELECT e PH xl Do BAND SEEK SEEK REV Fwo g CD AUX Radio with CD shown Radio with Six Disc CD similar 3 86 AA INE ulti 2c DI BAND x SEEK DVD CD REV Evo AUX Radio with CD and DVD The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system Radios with CD and DVD Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose Surround Sound System Some of its features are explained later in this section under Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system it has a CD DVD radio See Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 125 The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations
25. 3 17 Fog Lamps For vehicles with fog lamps the control is located next to the exterior lamps control on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column The ignition must be in the ON RUN position for the fog lamps to come on 4D Fog Lamps Press to turn the fog lamps on or off A light will come on in the instrument panel cluster When the fog lamps are turned on the parking lamps automatically turn on When the headlamps are changed to high beam the fog lamps also go off When the high beam headlamps are turned off the fog lamps will come on again Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp If the vehicle has this feature this button includes wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to install an auxiliary roof lamp This button is located on the overhead console When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof mounted lamp pressing the bottom of the button will activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light at the bottom of this button Pressing the top of the button will turn off the roof mounted lamp and indicator The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at 30 amps so the total current draw of the attached lamps should be less than this value The attachment points for the roof lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires located above the overhead console a dark green switched power wire and a black g
26. 5 115 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 5 115 Underhood Fuse Block sesssss 5 118 Windshield Wiper een 5 115 Gage Oil PEeSSUIEe 5 eripe ioo Ehe ORBI EO rea RORIS 3 47 Speedometer sessssseeeee 3 36 TACHOMETER tree ened e eke ei TERR 3 36 Voltmeter Gage esee 3 40 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature 3 43 gil ES 3 50 Trip Odometer s ir eee opt ttp ees 3 36 Garage Door Opener eseeseeeeee 2 67 Gasoline Octane s cieituectsem E E E EM SLIUDUS 5 5 Specifications eie sates leeks 5 6 Glove BOX noraen eaa e a Ee E E possa REE 2 74 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 7 Halogen Bulbs ccrte tien trien 5 56 Hazard Warning Flashers esee 3 6 Head Restraints erre trennen be 1 2 Headlamp AIAG e aae Mew eeta i iaee ies 5 53 Headlamps Bulb Replacement eseeeseeese 5 56 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 3 16 Exterior Lamps zi rera int a 3 15 Flash to Pass nano t zie Too EEs 3 8 High Low Beam Changer sssssss 3 8 Oni REMIND OP isis ecce naset dr te pee rede 3 16 Heated Seats sessesss 1 7 1 8 Galerien ds cane at atte aeeeira ganar culpa SL DEAE 3 22 Engine Coolant ssssee 2 28 Highbeam On Light sssee 3 49 Highway HYPNOSIS esisiini rti nettes 4 27 Hil
27. AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High position You must wait for the Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission into gear Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging the vehicle always wait for the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear The vehicle may have significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four Wheel Drive Low and Four Wheel Drive High ranges or from N Neutral while the engine is running 2 40 If the knob is turned to the Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High switch position when the vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 5 km h and the transmission is in N Neutral Shifting into Neutral To shift the transfer case to N Neutral do the following 1 Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll 2 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal See Parking Brake on page 2 42 for more information Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON RUN Put the transmission in N Neutral Shift the transfer case to Two Wheel Drive High
28. Bluetooth ERR m 3 114 Brake Emergencias usinisi nan 4 6 Pedal and Adjustable Throttle 2 27 Brakes Fluid saisit nt ibas sntentecedttiea uns 5 40 Brakes c eiue ia dupla epe RE o ceo A EE tuns 5 40 Poole ep A 4 5 Parkin per 2 42 System Warning Light sssseseesssss 3 40 Braking uices es tet beles E E 4 4 Braking in Emergencies eese 4 6 Break In New Vehicle eese 2 24 Bucket Seats Rear cceeeee 1 20 Bulb Replacement e eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 58 FOG Lamp pt eren a 3 18 Halogen Bulbs tete 5 56 Headlamp Aiming sene 5 53 Headlamps 5 etre rect ext nnmis 5 56 License Plate Lamps sseeeee 5 58 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back Up Lamps ences 5 57 Buying New Tires eee 5 78 Calibration sscf2cccesec ete pracen onena EE EEEE 3 61 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 California Fuel i cite se reto rette Ed bide 5 6 California Proposition 65 Warning 5 4 Camera Rear Vision cccccc cece eeeeeeeeeeeenes 2 59 Canadian Owners sese iii Capacities and Specifications 5 122 Carbon Monoxide eem 2 12 2 14 Engine Exfliaust coectetuer peste 2 46 Winter Driving eicere ariera 4 29 Care of
29. Capacities and Specifications on page 5 122 A CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 86 Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 102 When It Is Time for New Tires Various factors such as maintenance temperatures driving speeds vehicle loading and road conditions influence when you need new tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators 5 77 You need new tires if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge
30. Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty 7 12 Repair Facility We recommend that you choose a collision repa
31. The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 3 12 for more information Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 for more information Tow Haul Mode Light This light comes on when the Tow Haul mode has been activated For more information see Tow Haul Mode on page 2 35 3 49 Fuel Gage When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW message appears in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 for more information Here are some situations owners may experience with the fuel gage None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage e At the gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full t takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually United States Canada took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The fuel gage when the ignition is on shows how much fuel the vehicle has left in the tank The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on The gage first indicates empty before the vehicle is out of fuel and the vehicle s fuel tank should be filled soon For vehicles with a Two mode Hybrid s
32. The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Change phone The system responds with Please wait while search for other phones f another phone is found the response will be Phone name is now connected f another phone is not found the original phone remains connected Storing Name Tags The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and OnStar systems The system uses the following commands to store and retrieve phone numbers Store Digit Store Directory Using the Store Command The store command allows a phone number to be stored without entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Store The system responds with Store number please followed by a tone 3 Say the complete phone number to be stored at once with no pauses e Ifthe system recognizes the number it responds with OK Storing and repeats the phone number e Ifthe system is unsure it recognizes the phone number it responds with Store and repeats the number followed by Please say yes or no If the number is correct say Yes If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for the number to be re entered 4 After the system stores the phone nu
33. Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation Dealers may provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of the dealer s area Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs and public transportation is used instead of the dealer s shuttle service the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnig
34. You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm but be careful To save fuel run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold Moving about to keep warm also helps If it takes some time for help to arrive now and then when you run the engine push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps Do this as little as possible to save fuel If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 32 If the vehicle has a traction system it can often help to free a stuck vehicle Refer to the vehicle s traction system in the Index If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle turn the traction system off and use the rocking method A CAUTION If you let your vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured The vehicle ca
35. and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts wheel nuts and TPMS sensors for your vehicle Used Replacement Wheels ZN CAUTION Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous A CAUTION Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 86 for more information 5 83 Tire Chains If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information A CAUTION If your vehicle has P265 65R18 or P275 55R20 size tire
36. and only works when the information is available While the radio is tuned to an FM RDS station the station name or call letters displays In rare cases a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station Playing the Radio D Power Volume Press to turn the system on and off Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume Speed Compensated Volume SCV Radios with Speed Compensated Volume SCV automatically adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down The volume level should be consistent while driving 3 87 To activate SCV 1 Set the radio volume to the desired level 2 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 3 Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM automatic volume label on the radio displays 4 Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting OFF Low Med or High to select the level of radio volume compensation The display times out after approximately 10 seconds Each higher setting increases the audio volume to compensate for faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station BAND Press to switch between AM FM or XM if equipped The selection displays 44 Tune Turn to select radio stations K SEEK D Press either SEEK arrow to go to the previous or to the next station and sta
37. climate control system and heated seats the heated seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and will shut off when the key is turned to ON RUN If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system during remote start you will need to manually turn the heated seats on and off See Heated Seats on page 1 7 for additional information Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws may require a person using the remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel Your vehicle may run out of fuel If your vehicle has the remote start feature the RKE transmitter functions will have an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter see Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 4 for additional information Q Remote Start This button will be on the RKE transmitter if you have remote start To start the vehicle using the remote start feature 1 Aim the transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press and release the transmitter s lock button The vehicle s doors will lock Immediately press and hold the transmitter s remote start button until the turn signal lights flash If you cannot see the vehic
38. engine It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages If the vehicle has electric cooling fans you may hear the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday driving The fans may turn off if no cooling is required Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures or if you are operating the air conditioning system the fans may change to high speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly The fans will change to low speed when additional cooling is no longer required 5 37 Power Steering Fluid If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for reservoir location AAAA Li When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 5 38 How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick T
39. located on the bottom rear of the second row seat s on the inboard side to release 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or the seatback The seatback will fold forward OIE beat 3 Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts seat from the floor The seat will tumble forward still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the automatically safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat Power Release Fold and Tumble Feature The transmission must be in P Park for this feature to work Folding and Tumbling the Seat s A CAUTION Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when someone is sitting in the seat could cause injury to the person sitting there Always make sure there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing the automatic seat release button To fold and tumble the seat do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 From the front seats press one of the automatic seat release buttons located on the overhead console Overhead Console Buttons shown Panel Button similar Wh
40. or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage The rubber in tires degrades over time even if they are not being used This is also true for the spare tire if your vehicle has one Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place including temperatures loading conditions and inflation pressure maintenance With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out before they degrade due to age If you are unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get older consult the tire manufacturer for more information 5 78 Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidew
41. sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it is colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level Checking the Fluid Level Prepare the vehicle as follows 1 Park the vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running 2 With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in P Park 3 With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in P Park 4 Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps 1 Locate the transmission dipstick handle with this graphic which is located at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle C jon HOTS See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for more information on location 4 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and level The fluid level must be in the COLD area be
42. the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until the currently set language displays 3 Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to scroll through all of the available languages The available languages are ENGLISH default FRANCAIS French ESPANOL Spanish and NO CHANGE 4 Once the desired language is displayed release the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice DIC Compass Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver Information Center DIC Compass Zone The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory Your dealer retailer will set the correct zone for your location Under certain circumstances such as during a long distance cross country trip or moving to a new state or province it will be necessary to compensate for compass variance by resetting the zone through the DIC if the zone is not set correctly Compass variance is the difference between the earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If the compass is not set to the zone where you live the compass may give false readings The compass must be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling 3 61 To adjust for compass variance use the following procedure Compass Variance Zone Procedure 1 Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is moving Only set it when the vehicle is in P Park Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays Or if the vehi
43. the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate You can lock the doors turn the interior lamps off and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for those features In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for the airbag system If you do not get them the airbag System will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7 16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7 17 Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer retailer for service 1 89 Passenger Sensing System The vehicle has a pas
44. use this equipment PASS Key Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation Your vehicle has PASS Key Ill Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key Ill is a passive theft deterrent system The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or START from the LOCK OFF position You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft deterrent system When the PASS Key Ill system senses that someone is using the wrong key it prevents the vehicle from starting Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes If the engine does not start and the security light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to start the vehicle there may be a problem with your theft deterrent system Turn the ignition off and try again If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 115 If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle doe
45. 1500 series vehicles are maintenance free a Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc 6 7 b Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Visually check constant velocity joints rubber boots and axle seals for leaks c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year d Inspect wiper blades for wear cracking or contamination Clean the windshield and wiper blades if contaminated Replace wiper blades that are worn or damaged See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 59 and Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades on page 5 111 for more information e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt assemblies are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that mi
46. 3 Press the button again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out MP3 Radio with a Six Disc CD Player If the vehicle has a radio with a six disc CD player the radio has a MENU button instead of the clock button to set the time and date To set the time and date 1 Press the MENU button 2 Once the clock option displays press the pushbutton located under that label The HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year displays 3 Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels to change it Every time the pushbutton is pressed again the time or the date if selected increases by one Another way to increase the time or date is to press the right DI SEEK arrow or the PP FwD forward button To decrease the time or date press the left Ki SEEK arrow or the lt lt REV reverse button or turn the 44 tune knob located on the upper right side of the radio to adjust the selected setting Changing the Time and Date Default Settings To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month day year to day month year follow these instructions 1 Press the MENU button Once the option displays press the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the 12H hour and 24H hour and the date MM DD month and day and DD MM day and month displays
47. 5 110 Finish Care ssssssssee 5 110 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 111 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels ang TET esseeri eiria EE ORERE 5 112 uat It C I 5 112 Sheet Metal Damage seseeeees 5 113 Finish Damage 52 rede erret erunt etx 5 113 Underbody Maintenance eese 5 113 Chemical Paint Spotting ssusuus 5 113 Vehicle Identification essusssses 5 114 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 5 114 Service Parts Identification Label 5 114 Electrical System sseeseeseeeesse 5 114 Add On Electrical Equipment 5 114 Windshield Wiper Fuses eese 5 115 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 115 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 115 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 5 115 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 5 117 Underhood Fuse Block esssesss 5 118 Capacities and Specifications 5 122 Service For service and parts needs visit your dealer retailer You will receive genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco 5l Parts EJ Goodwrench E Accessories Accessories and Modifications When non dealer non retailer accessories are added to the vehicle th
48. ABS 4 5 Braking in Emergencies seeeeeeeee 4 6 StabiliTrak System sssssee 4 6 Locking Rear Axle eeeeeeseeeseeess 4 9 iru T 4 9 Off Road Recovery ssss 4 11 x 4 11 Loss of Control 4 11 Off Road Driving rete tens 4 12 Driving cat Night eiie t eei nes 4 25 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 26 Driving Your Vehicle Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4 27 Highway Hypnosis se 4 27 Hill and Mountain Roads sese 4 28 Winter Driving 2 ierra 4 29 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice OR SNOW 2 sccueet edesc cutie E 4 31 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 4 32 Recovery Hooks siirt ret tapete ee Rene nace 4 32 Loading the Vehicle esses 4 33 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment 4 40 TOWING ziarenia aiaee Eaa 4 44 Towing Your Vehicle eeeeeesee 4 44 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4 44 Level Control ater reete terne 4 51 Autoride oor ote tesis tee rodeo turc uoi eds 4 51 Towing a Trailer noc roten etn pen t 4 52 Trailer Recommendations esses 4 73 Your Driving the Road and Defensive Driving the Vehicle Defensive driving means always expect the unexpected The first step in driving defensively
49. Center www gmc com helpcenter FAQ Contact Us My GM Canada Canada www gm ca My GM Canada is a password protected section of www gm ca where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area My Dealers Retailers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers retailers My Driveway Access quick links to parts and service estimates check trade in values or schedule a service appointment by adding the vehicles you own to your driveway profile My Preferences Manage your profile and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up visit the My GM Canada section within WWW gm ca Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use the Text Telephones TTYs GMC has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with GMC by dialing 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices GMC encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail GMC the letter should be addressed to United States GMC Custom
50. E 7 17 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 3 16 Defensive Driving eceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeenenees 4 2 Delayed Locking eoe 2 10 DIC Compass eene iei Adee eae 3 61 DISC MPS Sect iate neni 3 102 3 107 Doing Your Own Service Work 5 4 Dome Lamp Override eesessssss 3 19 Dome LAMPS sarietan naasa 3 19 Door Delayed LOCKING zitieren tette Ete 2 10 Eoncgec E 2 10 Power Door LOCKS enir e ett dhaceaaiees 2 10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Rear Door Security LOCKS sssssse 2 11 Driver Information Center DIC 3 51 DIC Operation and Displays 3 52 3 57 DIC Vehicle Customization sssss 3 74 DIC Warnings and Messages 3 64 Driving ANION eee M 4 25 Before a Long Trip cesma nE 4 27 BIRD CETT 4 2 DONK eec c 4 3 Highway Hypnosis seeA 4 27 Hill and Mountain Roads esses 4 28 In Rain and on Wet Roads 4 26 Loss of Control isse corren ies 4 11 Off Hoad ornano a oecdie tese sed eta ie eis 4 12 Off Road Recovery essen 4 11 Recovery Hooks esee 4 32 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 32 WINLGH causea nae LIED E I anna 4 29 Driving for Better Fuel Economy 4 2 Dual Aut
51. If an object is caught between the liftgate and the body and presses against this sensor the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or closed manually Do not force the liftgate open or closed during a power cycle Manual Operation of Power Liftgate To change the liftgate to manual operation press the switch on the overhead console to the OFF position With the power liftgate disabled and all of the doors unlocked the liftgate can be manually opened and closed To open the liftgate press the touchpad on the handle on the outside of the liftgate and lift the gate open To close the liftgate use the pull cup to lower the liftgate and close The liftgate latch will power close Always close the liftgate before driving If the RKE button or the power close button on the liftgate is pressed while power operation is disabled the lights will flash three times but the liftgate will not move It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate open however if you must drive with the liftgate open the liftgate should be set to manual operation by pressing the OFF switch on the center console The liftgate has an electric latch If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage the liftgate will not open The liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged If the battery is properly connected with adequate voltage the switch is no
52. Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability 5 71 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under in
53. Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable does not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 5 47 9 Connect the other end of the negative cable to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service Notice f the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal 5 48 Jumper Cable Removal Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that h
54. OnStar Owner s Guide in the vehicle s glove box visit onstar com or onstar ca or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation Vehicles with the OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation System can provide voice guided driving directions Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor locate a business or address and download driving directions to the vehicle Voice guided directions to the desired destination will play through the audio system speakers See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information 2 65 OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling that uses minutes to access location based weather local traffic reports and stock quotes Press the phone button and give a few simple voice commands to browse through the various topics See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information This feature is only available in the continental U S OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a Talk Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands Free Calling See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 136 for more information On some vehicles the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems or to dial phone extensions See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information 2 66 How OnStar Service Works The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle informati
55. Readiness ess 3 37 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning 3 42 Brake System Warning sssesessss 3 40 Charging System seeeseeesesees 3 39 Cruise Control airis iiaei oain Sa nEaN 3 49 Exterior Lamps 1 cecinere nene 3 15 Flashzto Pass inei eec Ere eR PERI 3 8 Fog Elo NE 3 49 Highbeam Or esc ece Liceo aoc E 3 49 High Low Beam Changer ssssssee 3 8 Low Fuel Warning eeeeeeeeeeeese 3 51 Oll Pr ssure i Loose deret e ties 3 48 On Reminder eseseeeeee 3 16 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 38 Safety Belt Reminders sssssesssss 3 36 SECUN aer P N AE 3 48 StabiliTrak Indicator sisis iriri 3 42 Mire PIeSSUEO cerniera ai aaia 3 43 Tow Haul Mode eese 3 49 Loading Your Vehicle eeseseseeseses 4 33 Locking Rear Axle ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 4 9 Locks Delayed LOCKING ararsan 2 10 DOOF re 2 10 Lockout Protection cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 12 Power DOOL ccccecceeeeceeeeeeseneeeeeeeeaeeaens 2 10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Rear Door Security Locks ssuuss 2 11 l oss of COMTO oar tia chine erui bres 4 11 Low Fuel Warning Light esses 3 51 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 66 Luggage Carrie
56. Readiness Light on page 3 37 for more information including important safety information If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit il 2 3 Turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1 78 5 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit turn the vehicle off Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion if adjustable to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint See Head Restraints on page 1 2 Restart the vehicle The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child s seating posture and body build It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat 1 93 If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Adult Size Occupant If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passeng
57. Remote Keyless Entry System Driver Power Door Lock Unlock Feature Circuit Breaker Usage Driver Side Power Window Circuit Breaker Harness Connector LT DR Driver Door Harness Connection BODY BODY Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel fuse block is located underneath the instrument panel to the left of the steering column Top View HEADLINER HEADLINER HEADLINER 1 SEO UPFITTER Harness Connector BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2 BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1 BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3 5 117 Harness Connector HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3 HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2 HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1 Special Equipment Option Upfitter Circuit Breaker Usage CB1 Passenger Side Power Window Circuit Breaker Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker Driver Seat Circuit Breaker Underhood Fuse Block Rear Sliding Window 5 118 The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle Lift the cover for access to the fuse relay block If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information Notice Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it Always keep the covers on any electrical component To remove fuses hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out rH F
58. Safety Belts ssssssessseseeee 5 109 Cargo CoVel rS 2 76 DA ULP 3 102 3 107 Center Console Storage sssssssss 2 74 Center Seal coerceri ER 1 13 Chains Tire RCM 5 84 Charging System Light esesssssssss 3 39 Check Engine Lamp iere there Ap XU Rea 3 44 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 12 Chemical Paint Spotting ssesssssse 5 113 Child Restraints Infants and Young Children 1 57 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 66 Older Children 0 c cceececeececeeeeeeeeeeaeees 1 54 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position c eceeeeeeeeeee sees 1 73 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position 1 77 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 1 78 SYSlOMS UH 1 61 Where to Put the Restraint 1 64 Cigarette Lighter verises enirere asina 3 22 Circuit Breakers ccccecceeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 115 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 112 Exterior Lamps Lenses seeeseses 5 110 Fabric Carpet ssesene 5 108 Finish Gate z iioi asana nnana ice 5 110 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces sss 5 109 lg EE 5 106 I ruglge n 5 108 MESo erecta E E cee 5 112 Un
59. Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service contact your dealer retailer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer retailer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership retailer let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Courtesy Transportation Program To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada and extended powertrain and hybrid specific warranty in both the U S and Canada Several courtesy transportation options are available to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Transportation Options
60. That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest hb SAY lt N A SS i J g AS AT mn p A The belt is behind the body 1 43 Q What is wrong with this A5 CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer retailer to fix it i a d A The belt is twisted across the body 1 44 Lap Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap shoulder belt except for the center front passenger position if equipped which has a lap belt See Lap Belt on page 1 52 for more information The lap shoulder belts for the first and second row seating positions are equipped with free falling latch plates If the vehicle has a third row the lap shoulder belts have either free falling or cinching latch plates Use the following pictures to determine the latch plate style Cinching Latch Plate The following instructions explain how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly 1 Adjust the seat if the seat is adjustable so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 2 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder bel
61. Using the Delete All Name Tags Command The delete all name tags command deletes all stored phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar if present To use the delete all name tags command il 2 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Delete all name tags The system responds with You are about to delete all name tags stored in your phone directory and your route destination directory Are you sure you want to do this Please Say yes or no e Say Yes to delete all name tags Say No to cancel the function and return to the main menu Making a Call Calls can be made using the following commands Dial Digit Dial Call Re dial Using the Dial Command 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Dial The system responds with Dial using phone name gt Number please followed by a tone Say the entire number without pausing f the system recognizes the number it responds with OK Dialing and dials the number f the system does not recognize the number it confirms the numbers followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Dialing and dials the number If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for the number to be re entered 3 119 Using the Digit Dial Command 1 3 120 Pre
62. XM Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No XM Signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading XM The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Channel Off Air This channel is not currently in service Tune in to another channel Channel Unauth This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package Channel Unavail This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Artist Info No artist information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Title Info No song title information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No CAT Info No category information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Information No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel The system is working properly CAT Not Found There are no channels available for the selected category The system is working properly XM Theftlocked The XM receiver
63. Year Starter Switch Check A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake on page 2 42 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle should start only in P Park or N Neutral If the vehicle starts in any other position contact your dealer retailer for service Automatic Transmission Shift Lock 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to ON RUN but do not start the engine Without applying the Control System Check regular brake try to move the shift lever out A CAUTION of P Park with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of P Park contact your dealer retailer for service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to LOCK OFF in each shift lever position e The ignition should turn to LOCK OFF only when the shift lever is in P Park When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a e The ignition key should co
64. a trailer Basic Trailer Wiring The trailer wiring harness with a seven pin connector is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the vehicle s frame The harness connector can be plugged into a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector available through your dealer retailer The seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal Brown Taillamps White Ground Light Green Back up Lamps Red Battery Feed Dark Blue Trailer Brake The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center but the wires are not connected They should be connected by your dealer retailer or a qualified service center 4 71 Heavy Duty Trailer Wiring Harness Package The vehicle is equipped with the seven wire trailer towing harness This harness with a seven pin universal trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform 4 72 The seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal Brown Taillamps White Ground Light Green Back up Lamps Red Battery Feed Dark Blue Trailer Brake The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center but the wires are not connected They should be connected by your dealer retailer or a qualified service center If
65. a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If the airbags deploy the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location If the keys are locked in the vehicle call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock the doors OnStar Hands Free Calling including 30 trial minutes good for 60 days is available on most vehicles OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation service with one trial route is available on most vehicles Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service 2 64 OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber glove box literature Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar After the first prepaid year contact OnStar to select a monthly or annual subscription payment plan If a payment plan is not selected the OnStar system and all services including airbag notification and emergency services may be deactivated and no longer available For more information visit onstar com U S or onstar ca Canada or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services described below or for a full description of OnStar s
66. after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 3 60 Relearn Remote Key To access this display the vehicle must be in P Park This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters to your vehicle To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle 1 Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays 2 Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE will display 3 Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds On vehicles with memory recall seats the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2 A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 4 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it 5 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK OFF Language This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear To select a language 1 Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays 2 While in the ODOMETER display press and hold
67. aly 1ever groune USE VS spi Tar TO TOW or into traffic if facing uphill Always put the shift lever fully in P Park with the 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer parking brake firmly set wheels If the transfer case on a four wheel drive vehicle is 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the in N Neutral the vehicle will be free to roll even regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load if the shift lever is in P Park Be sure the transfer 4 Reapply the brake pedal Then apply the parking case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral brake and shift into P Park 4 70 Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal while you Start the engine Shift into a gear Release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer See this manual s Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Trailer Wiring Harness The vehicle is equipped with the following wiring harnesses for towing
68. are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passenger s are restrained properly too 1 32 A CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 36 for additional information In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law requires wearing safety belts Here is why You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a serious one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Put someone on it Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels 1 33 Get
69. are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill see Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 For vehicles without a release handle set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down then pushing down the parking brake pedal If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 40 Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down then push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release Slowly pull your foot up off the park brake pedal If the parking brake is not released when you begin to drive the brake system warning light will flash and a chime will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill see Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 2 43 Shifting Into Park A CAUTION 3 Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral 4 Turn the ignition key to LOCK OFF 5 Remove the key and take it with you If you can It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can
70. at the same time In many emergencies steering can help more than even the very best braking Brake Assist This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased StabiliTrak System The vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended pa
71. back to the right While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door A CAUTION Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 110 When replacing the fuel cap insert the tether in its hole before tightening the cap Turn the fuel cap clockwise until it clicks It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 44 If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap is not properly installed ZN CAUTION If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediat
72. be exceeded A CAUTION On some vehicles that have certain front mounted equipment such as a snow plow it may be possible to load the front axle to the front gross axle weight rating GAWR but not have enough weight on the rear axle to have proper braking performance If your brakes can not work properly you could have a crash To help your brakes work properly when a snow plow is installed always follow the snow plow manufacturer or installers recommendation for rear ballast to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio even though the actual front weight may be less than the front GAWR and the total vehicle weight is less than the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR Maintaining a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio is necessary to provide proper braking performance Total vehicle reserve capacity is the difference between your GVWR and the weight of your vehicle with full fuel and passengers It is the amount of weight you can add to your vehicle before reaching your GVWR Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers are intended as a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or cargo your vehicle can carry If you are unsure of your vehicle s front rear or total weight go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer retailer can also help you with this The total vehicle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification Tire label as s
73. button to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM FM or XM if equipped stations The balance fade and tone settings that were previously adjusted are stored with the favorite stations To store a station as a favorite 1 Tune to the desired radio station 2 Press the FAV button to display the page where the station is to be stored 3 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds When that pushbutton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 4 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station to be stored as a favorite The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button To setup the number of favorites pages 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1 6 label 3 Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page numbers 4 Press the FAV button or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the process of programming favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble BASS MID TREB Bass Midrange or Treble To adjust bass midrange or treble press the 44 knob until the tone control labels display Continue pressi
74. button to turn the recirculation mode on or off An indicator light comes on to show that recirculation is on This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle It can be used to help prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor defrost or defogging modes If recirculation is selected while in one of those modes the indicator flashes three times and turns off The air conditioning compressor will also come on when this mode is activated While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed The recirculation mode can also be turned off by turning off the engine REAR Press to turn the rear heating and air conditioning on See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System on page 3 31 or Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls on page 3 33 for more information 3 24 Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window QW Rear Window Defogger Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off The system automatically turns off several minutes after it has been activated The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirro
75. charging a remote non vehicle battery press the Tow Haul mode button if equipped located at the end of the shift lever This will boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery If the trailer is too light for Tow Haul mode or the vehicle is not equipped with Tow Haul turn on the headlamps as a second way to boost the vehicle system and charge the battery Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package These provisions are for an electric brake controller The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector for the trailer brake controller The harness contains the following wires Dark Blue Brake Signal to Trailer Connector Red Black Battery Light Blue White Brake Switch White Ground It should be installed by your dealer retailer or a qualified service center If the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC the blunt cuts exist but are not connected further in the harness If an aftermarket trailer brake controller is installed the ITBC must be disconnected Do not power both ITBC and aftermarket controllers to control the trailer brakes at the same time Trailer Recommendations Subtract the hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating CWR CWR is the maximum weight of the load the vehicle can carry It does not include the weight of the people inside but you can figure about 150 Ibs
76. conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags ina crash and if so equipped to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle These modules may store data to help your dealer retailer technician service your vehicle Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed These modules may also retain the owner s personal preferences such as radio pre sets seat positions and temperature settings Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was pressing the accelerator and or brake pedal How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Important EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by
77. could damage the emission control system on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle Reduce vehicle speed Avoid hard accelerations Avoid steep uphill grades e f towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park the vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required 3 45 An emission system malfunction might be corrected by The dealer retailer has the proper test equipment and doing the following diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed See Filling problems that might have developed the Tank on page 5 9 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle of water the vehicle s electrical system might be wet The condition is usually corrected when th
78. could be more noticeable with a cold transmission This difference in shifting is normal M Manual Mode This position is available on vehicles with the Hydra Matic 6 Speed transmission It lets drivers select the range of gears appropriate for current driving conditions If the vehicle has this feature see Range Select Mode Hydra Matic 6 Speed transmission later in this section 3 Third This position is also used for normal driving It reduces vehicle speed more than D Drive without using the brakes You might choose 3 Third instead of D Drive when driving on hilly winding roads when towing a trailer so there is less shifting between gears and when going down a steep hill 2 Second This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 3 Third without using the brakes You can use 2 Second on hills It can help control vehicle speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use the brakes off and on If you manually select 2 Second in an automatic transmission the transmission will start in second gear You can use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces 1 First For the Hydra Matic 4 Speed transmission this position reduces vehicle speed even more than 2 Second without using the brakes You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in 1 First
79. described under How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid earlier in this section When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 5 24 Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheating the transmission If you suspect a small leak then use the following checking procedures to check the fluid level However if there is a large leak then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer retailer service department and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the Maintenance Schedule See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Hecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust sy
80. displayed The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts downshifts of the transmission When this happens a reduction in acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration may be heard This is normal If cruise control is being used when the system activates the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise control will automatically disengage Cruise control may be reengaged when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 3 12 StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle see your dealer retailer for service Locking Rear Axle Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when traction is low this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle Steering Power Steering If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the system is not functioning the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the
81. driver side seating position but not both at the same time Third Row Three Passenger For models with a three passenger third row seat see the information following for installing a child restraint with a top tether in the third row if your vehicle has one Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor For models with 60 40 second row seating the rear right side passenger and center seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion For models with second row bucket seats both rear seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion Second Row Seat Bucket For models with bucket second row seating the top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed Second Row Seat 60 40 For models with 60 40 second row seating the top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed 1 69 Ae Third Row Seat Two or Three Passenger V For vehicles with a two passe
82. driver or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N Neutral 4 Shift the transfer case to N Neutral See Shifting into Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 37 for the proper procedure to select the Neutral position for the vehicle 5 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle 6 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF and remove the key the steering wheel will still turn After towing see Shifting Out of Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 37 for the proper procedure to take the vehicle out of the Neutral position Dolly Towing Front Towing Front Wheels Off the Ground Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice f a two wheel drive vehicle is towed with the rear wheels on the ground the transmission could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed To dolly tow a two wheel drive vehicle the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly See Rear Towing Rear Wheels Off the Ground later in this section for more information 4 47 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles A CAUTION Shifting a four wheel drive
83. easy exit seat movement will only occur one time after the key is removed from the ignition If the automatic movement has already occurred and you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again the seat will stay in the original exit position unless a memory recall took place prior to removing the key again NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 80 EASY EXIT SETUP If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat feature It also allows you to turn off the automatic easy exit feature See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 1 8 and EASY EXIT RECALL earlier for more information Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the menu up down button to scroll through the following settings OFF No automatic seat exit will recall SEAT ONLY Default The driver s seat will recall NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC MEMORY SEAT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select your preference for the remote memory se
84. engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Hood Release To open the hood 1 Pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle to the lower left of the steering wheel Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary hood release near the center of the grille Push the secondary hood release to the right 4 Lift the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then bring the hood from full open to within 6 inches 152 mm from the closed position pause then push the front center of the hood with a Swift firm motion to fully close the hood Engine Compartment Overview If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information When you open the hood on the 5 3L engine 4 8L 6 0L and 6 2L similar here is what you will see Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 19 Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 5 28 Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 44 Battery on page 5 43 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 15 Automatic Transmission Dipstick See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission on page 5 21 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmis
85. extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer retailer If you do not the engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal On vehicles with this feature you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the vehicle is in R Reverse or while using the cruise control SS gt Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the pedals closer to your body Press the arrow at the top of the switch to move the pedals away from your body Before you start driving fully press the brake pedal to confirm the adjustment is right for you While driving make only small adjustments The vehicle may have a memory function which lets pedal settings be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 1 8 for more information The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system 2 27 Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater can provide easier starti
86. for these features is on the pages following Turn and Lane Change Signals An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn Raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change This causes the turn signals to automatically flash three times It will flash six times if tow haul mode is active Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second will cause the turn signals to flash until you release the lever The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is released If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows flash rapidly or do not come on a signal bulb could be burned out Have the bulbs replaced If the bulb is not burned out check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 115 Turn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the Driver Information Control DIC To turn the chime and message off move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 2D D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam push the lever toward the instrument panel To return to low beam headlamps pull the multifunction lever toward you Then r
87. front seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 53 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle see if you are using the correct buckle Be sure that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer retailer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender 1 53 Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belt
88. in very hot dusty weather You might use the vehicle in making deliveries Or you might drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You might need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition see your dealer retailer This schedule is for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving on page 4 12 use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6 7 for further information ZN CAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your dealer retailer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 Some maintenance services can be complex S
89. in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If the vehicle has been in a crash do you need new safety belts or LATCH system if equipped parts After a very minor crash nothing may be necessary But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged See your dealer retailer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash you may need new LATCH system parts New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system if equipped was not being used at the time of the crash If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash if the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 37 1 99 42 NOTES 1 100 Section 2 Features and Controls ROY m 2 3 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 24 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 2 4 New Vehi
90. is no longer off See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings NORMAL The chime volume will be set to a normal level LOUD The chime volume will be set to a loud level NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain There is no default for chime volume The volume will stay at the last known setting To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC PARK TILT MIRRORS If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select whether or not the outside mirror s will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2 51 for more information Press the customization button until PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following setti
91. is to amp wear your safety belt See Safety Belts They Are for Driving habits can affect fuel mileage Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time When road and weather conditions are appropriate use cruise control if equipped Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require Keep vehicle tires properly inflated Combine several trips into a single trip Replace the vehicle s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire s sidewall near the size Follow recommended scheduled maintenance A CAUTION Assume that other road users pedestrians bicyclists and other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready In addition Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you Focus on the task of driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunk Driving A CAUTION Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Do not drink and drive or ride with
92. it might have rolled over If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping The best way to prevent this is to walk the course first so you know what the surface is like before driving it Stalling on an Incline A CAUTION Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline be sure you and any passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you will be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand the wheels do not get good traction Acceleration is not as quick turning is more difficult and braking distances are longer It is best to use a low gear when in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud keep the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck When driving on sand wheel traction changes On loosely packed sand such as on beaches or sand dunes the tires will tend to sink into the sand This affects s
93. it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop 1 34 The person keeps going until stopped by something In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense 1 35 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q A pr Will be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted And you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down If my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear safety belts Airbags are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Whether or not an airbag is provided all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions 1 36 Q If am a good driver and I never drive far from A home why should wear safety belts You may be an excellent driver but if you are in a crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger s can be hurt Being a good
94. keys in a vehicle with children When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows The power window controls are located on each of the side doors Driver s Side shown The driver s door also has switches that control the passenger and rear windows The power windows work when the ignition has been turned to ACC ACCESSORY ON RUN or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 26 Press the switch to lower the window Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window Express Down Windows Windows with an express down feature allow the windows to be lowered without holding the switch Press down fully on the window switch then release to activate the express down mode The express down mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the front edge of the switch Window Lockout Window Lockout The window lockout switch is located with the power window switches on the driver s door armrest This feature prevents the rear passenger windows from operating except from the driver s position Press the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on 2 20 Sun Visors Pull the sun visor down to block glare Detach the sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the rod from side to side to cover the
95. may be needed by the driver to correct the condition Multiple messages may appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be cleared You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information 3 64 CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed When you change the engine oil be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 for information on how to reset the message See Engine Oil on page 5 15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information CHECK TIRE PRESSURE On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires needs to be checked This message also displays LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT RE
96. message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service as soon as possible See your dealer retailer SERVICE BRAKES SOON This message displays if there is a problem with the brake system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service See your dealer retailer SERVICE PARK ASSIST If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system this message displays if there is a problem with the URPA system Do not use this system to help you park See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 53 for more information See your dealer retailer for service SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system and this message displays both SBZA displays will remain on indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system If these displays remain on after continued driving the system needs service See your dealer retailer See Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA on page 2 55 for more information 3 69 SERVICE STABILITRAK If your vehicle has StabiliTrak and this message displays it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system If you see this message try to reset the system Stop turn off the engine for at least 15
97. mode press the FAV button or BAND button to display favorites again Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu To remove an undesired category 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label 3 Turn the 44 knob to display the category to be removed 4 Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the word Removed displays 5 Repeat the steps to remove more categories Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph 8 km h Radio Messages Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for the vehicle from the factory If Calibration Error displays it means that the radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer retailer for service Locked This message displays when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service If any error occurs repeatealy or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM Satellite Radio
98. move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow With four wheel drive if the transfer case is in N Neutral the vehicle will be free to roll even if the shift lever is in P Park So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 1 Hold the brake pedal down then set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 42 for more information 2 Move the shift lever into the P Park position by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go 2 44 leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand the vehicle is in P Park Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running A CAUTION It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set If you have four wheel drive and the transfer case is in N Neutral the vehicle will be free to roll even if the shift lever is in P Park So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running unless you have to If you have to leave the vehicle w
99. movements will occur See MEMORY SEAT RECALL under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 for more information To stop recall movement of the memory function at any time press one of the power seat controls memory buttons power mirror buttons or adjustable pedal switch If something has blocked the driver s seat and or the adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position the driver s seat and or the adjustable pedals recall may stop working If this happens remove the obstruction and press the appropriate control for the area that is not responding for two seconds Try recalling the memory position again by pressing the appropriate memory button If the memory position is still not recalling see your dealer for service Easy Exit Seat The control for this feature is located on the driver s door panel between buttons 1 and 2 With the vehicle in PARK P the driver s seat exit position can be recalled by pressing the exit button You will hear a single beep and the driver s seat will move back If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the Driver Information Center DIC automatic seat movement will occur when the key is removed from the ignition See EASY EXIT SEAT under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 for more information The memory seat and easy exit features can also be programmed using the DIC For programming information see DIC Vehicle C
100. must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and comply with RSS 210 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Tire Pressure Monitor Operation If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle s tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument panel cluster At the same time a message to check the pressure in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center DIC display The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
101. obstruction The sunroof will then open halfway and the air deflector will raise To close the sunroof once it has re opened refer to the Express Close or Manual Close functions described previously If the sunroof is in the vent position and there is an object in the path of the sunroof when it closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof To close the sunroof once it has re opened refer to the Manual Close or Express Close functions described previously Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time while the vehicle is not in use Debris can collect in the tracks damage the sunroof operation and plug the water draining system Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview 3 4 Electric Power Management 3 20 Hazard Warning Flashers seesssss 3 6 Battery Run Down Protection 3 21 gum 3 6 Accessory Power Outlet S sssssse 3 21 Tilt WG p 3 6 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter 3 22 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever sess 3 7 Qlimate Controls eee 3 22 Turn and Lane Change Signals 3 7 Climate Control System ccccccceesseeeeeeeees 3 22 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 3 8 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 3 25 Flash to Pass TUE 3 8 Outlet A
102. of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight 5 68 Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper ae the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufact
103. of the feature settings menu Exiting the Feature Settings Menu The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs The vehicle is no longer in ON RUN The trip fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are pressed The end of the feature settings menu is reached and exited A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made Audio System s Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features A CAUTION Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving do the following while the vehicle is parked Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system Set up the tone speaker adjustments and preset radio stations For more information see Defensive Driving on page 4 2 Notice Contact your dealer retailer before adding any equipment Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere with the operation of the vehicle s engine radio or other systems and could damage them Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone equipment The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the
104. of their respective owners This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system works with the vehicle s audio system The DVD player is part of the front radio The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player a video display screen audio video jacks two wireless headphones a remote control and if the vehicle has a third row seat it may have a second video display screen and two additional wireless headphones See Radio s on page 3 86 for more information on the vehicle s audio DVD system Before Driving The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so In severe or extreme weather cond
105. or an underbody car washing system can do this Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this we will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first 5 113 Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN w SAMPLE4UX1M072675 This is the legal identifier for the vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver side It can be seen through the windshield from outside the vehicle The VIN also appears on the Certification Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code helps identify the vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 122 for the vehicle s engine code 5 114 Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the inside of the glove box It is very helpful if parts need to be ordered The label has the following information
106. other vehicle and locate the positive and negative terminal locations on that vehicle Your vehicle has a remote positive jump starting terminal and a remote negative jump starting terminal You should always use these remote terminals instead of the terminals on the battery If the vehicle has a remote positive terminal it is located under a red plastic cover at the positive battery post To uncover the remote positive terminal open the red plastic cover de i SA BS E SA EN AS SS amp x fs d DAP Wem Z FIT eee ZAR Num The remote negative terminal is a stud located on the right front of the engine where the negative battery cable attaches See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for more information on the location of the remote positive and remote negative terminals 5 45 As CAUTION Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you AN CAUTION Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes
107. others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package 10 Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp 5 56 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back up Lamps If you vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the supplement for the bulb changing procedure A Taillamp Turn Signal Lamp B Back up Lamp C Stoplamp Taillamp To replace one of these bulbs 1 Open the liftgate See Power Liftgate on page 2 14 2 Remove the two screws from the taillamp assembly Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until you disengage the inner pins on the taillamp assembly from the vehicle Press the release tab if bulb socket has one and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket Press a new bulb into the bulb socket and insert it into the taillamp assembly Turn the bulb socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly until it clicks Reinstall the taillamp assembly When reinstalling make sure to line up the pins on the taillamp assembly with the vehicle If you do not do this you will not be able correctly install the taillamp assembly 5 57 License Plate Lamp 1 Remove the two screws holding each of the license plate lamps to the molding that is part of the liftgate 2 Twist and pull the license plate lamp forward through the molding openi
108. parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill the washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage the vehicle s windshield washer system and paint 5 39 Brakes Do not top off the brake fluid Adding fluid does not correct a leak If fluid is added when the linings are worn Brake Flui there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are d installed Add or remove brake fluid as necessary only The brake master cylinder when work is done on the brake hydraulic system DOT 3 ore A Engine Compartment ZN CAUTION Overview on page 5 14 for the location of the If too much brake fluid is added it can spill on the reservoir engine and burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and the vehicle could CI be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down When the brake fluid falls to a low level the brake The brake fluid level goes down because of normal warning light comes on See Brake System Warning brake lining wear When new linings are installed Light on page 3 40 the fluid level goes back up Re
109. press amp for more than two seconds The audio Switches from the cell phone to the vehicle Voice Pass Thru Voice Pass Thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone See the cell phone manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature This feature can be used to verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Voice The system responds with OK accessing phone name gt The cell phone s normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone s operating instructions Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Tones The in vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and numbers stored as name tags during a call This is used when calling a menu driven phone system Account numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls Sending a Number During a Call 1 Press amp The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Dial The system responds with Say a number to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the number to send e f the system clearly recognizes the number it responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues f the system is not sure it recognized th
110. reception 3 138 If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to the glass make sure that the grid lines for the AM FM antenna are not damaged There is enough space between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering with radio reception Notice Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside of the rear side windows may affect radio reception or damage the rear side window antenna Repairs would not be covered by the warranty Do not clear the inside of the rear side windows with sharp objects Notice Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with metallic film The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radio reception Any damage caused to the antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered by the warranty XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for clear radio reception If the vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open Section 4 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle 4 2 Driving for Better Fuel Economy 4 2 Defensive Driving ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Drunk Driving i i onore tnn ben cedente nme tnb 4 3 Control of a Vehicle seeeeeeeeeeses 4 3 Braking MET 4 4 Antilock Brake System
111. restraint and the instructions in this manual A CAUTION Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash attach only one child restraint per anchor A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed Notice Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle s safety belts This may damage these parts If necessary move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled This could damage the safety belt or the seat Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position before folding the seat 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your chi
112. roading can be great fun but has some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself When off road driving traffic lanes are not marked curves are not banked and there are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers Failure to operate the vehicle correctly off road could result in loss of vehicle control or vehicle rollover Off roading involves some new skills That is why it is very important that you read these driving tips and suggestions to help make off road driving safer and more enjoyable Before You Go Off Roading Have all necessary maintenance and service work done Make sure there is enough fuel that fluid levels are where they should be and that the spare tire if the vehicle has one is fully inflated Besure to read all the information about four wheel drive vehicles in this manual Make sure all underbody shields if the vehicle has them are properly attached Know the local laws that apply to off roading where you will be driving or check with law enforcement people in the area Besure to get the necessary permission if you will be on private land If you think you will need some more ground clearance at the front of your vehicle you can remove the front fascia lower air dam The air dam is held in place by two bolts and 10 snaps accessible from underneath the front fascia To remove the air dam 1 Remove the tw
113. seconds then start the engine again If this message still comes on it means there is a problem You should see your dealer retailer for service The vehicle is safe to drive however you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak so reduce your speed and drive accordingly SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Autoride suspension system this message displays when the Autoride suspension system is not operating properly Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the theft deterrent system The vehicle may or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer retailer before turning off the engine See PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation on page 2 23 for more information 3 70 SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays if a part on the TPMS is not working properly The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 43 Several conditions may cause this message to appear See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 73 for more information If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPMS See your dealer retailer SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when there is a problem with the Trac
114. shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise accident When changing a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 86 5 96 Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 122 for the wheel nut torque specification When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire you must also reinstall either the center cap or the bolt on hub cap depending on which your vehicle has For center caps line up the tab on the center cap with the slot in the wheel The cap only goes in one way Place the cap on the wheel and press until it snaps into place AN CAUTION For bolt on hub caps line up the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and tighten clockwise by hand to get them started Then tighten with the wheel wrench until snug Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufa
115. siae E O 5 91 REMOVING tm 5 87 SIONN aeea E a EEA A 5 102 Specifications and Capacities 5 122 Speedometer ccceeeceseceeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaes 3 36 Split Bench Seat 60 40 ssesesssss 1 14 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 3 42 13 StabiliTrak System eeeeeeeennnnr 4 6 Start Vehicle Remote ssseenm 2 7 Starting the Engine sees 2 26 Seer TEMPE 4 9 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 3 136 Steering Wheel Tilt Wheel sssusssss 3 6 Steps Power ASSIST i co coor s ira Yir deter eek E RES 2 17 Storage Areas Genter Console pellet ud aaa 2 74 C pholderS ssrin aA 2 74 GIOVE BOX acid P 2 74 Luggage Carrier ssesseeeeeeeseee 2 75 PACA ecran titia t iniavan tis Rides E dtu AE AU 2 76 Rear Seat Armrest eesseee 2 76 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 4 31 SUN VISOfB Lice rte aaae aA 2 20 SUMMOOL M anan a a AA i AEA 2 77 Tachometer cccc cece eee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneneeeees 3 36 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back up Lamps 5 57 Text Telephone TTY Users 7 6 Theft Deterrent Feature sseesessse 3 136 14 Theft Deterrent Systems ssesssssssse 2 20 Content Theft Deterrent
116. spinal injury in a crash Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash 1 2 Pull the head restraint up to raise it To lower the head restraint press the button located on the top of the seatback and push the restraint down Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place The head restraints are not designed to be removed The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted up and down Front Seats Manual Seats A CAUTION You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving If the vehicle has a manual seat it can be moved forward or rearward 1 Lift the bar to unlock the seat 2 Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place Power Seats Your vehicle may have additional features to adjust your vehicle s power seat Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or dow
117. splashes on the ignition system and the vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get the tailpipe under water If the tailpipe is under water you will never be able to start the engine When going through water remember that when the brakes get wet it might take longer to stop See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4 26 After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust System for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling System for any leakage The vehicle requires more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Night driving tips include Drive defensively Do not drink and drive Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead Watch for animals When tired pull off the road Do not wear sunglasses Avoid staring di
118. spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Usage Fluid Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil on page 5 15 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 5 29 Engine Oil Engine Coolant Usage Fluid Lubricant DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid Rupee Brake GM Part No U S 12377967 Syst 5 Canada 89021320 Masher Optikleen Washer Solvent GM Power Steering Fluid GM Part No U S 89021184 Canada 89021186 Automatic DEXRONS VI Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Key Lock GM Part No U S 12346241 y E Canada 10953474 Chassis Lubricant GM Part No U S 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Chassis Lubrication Front Axle 1500 Series Vehicles with Four Wheel Drive SAE 80W 90 Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 89021671 in Canada 89021672 Usage _ Fluid Lubrican
119. suse 5 62 Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 67 Inflation Tire Pressure eese 5 70 Tire Pressure Monitor System 5 71 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Tire Pressure Monitor Operation Tire Inspection and Rotation When It Is Time for New Tires Buying New Tires eeeeeeeeeeeeeses Different Size Tires and Wheels Uniform Tire Quality Grading Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Wheel Replacement seeseeessse Tire GHAINS iae oe rne tdt tes pe nery exse ee tede If a Tire Goes Flat seseesseeeeess Changing a Flat Tire o Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spalte Wine sisse tiet eaten satedun t uds Secondary Latch System Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Spare TIE 1 iciacc ee societe rete peers Appearance Care l eener Interior Cleaning esee Fabric Garpet ias nette cte euer Leather 5i tete temx tre tete Ears eia e Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic UNM ACES s PE ETE Care of Safety Belts seesssessssssse Weatherstrips cesses 5 109 Washing Your Vehicle esses 5 110 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses
120. system A Fan Control F Driver and B REAR Passenger C Recirculation Temperature D Air Delivery Mode Controls Control G Rear Window E Air Conditioning Defogger Temperature Control Move the thumbwheels up or down to increase or decrease the temperature on the driver s side or the passenger side of the vehicle for the dual zone system gg Fan Control Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off Air Delivery Mode Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the airflow direction inside the vehicle By positioning the knob between two modes a combination of those modes is selected Select from the following modes A Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets De Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets Some air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets ted Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some of the air directed to the windshield side window and second row floor outlets In this mode the system automatically selects outside air Recirculation cannot be selected when in Floor Mode n Defog The defog mode is used to clear the windows of fog or moisture Ai
121. tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 e f the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu 3 118 Using the Directory Command The directory command lists all of the name tags stored by the system To use the directory command 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Directory The system responds with Directory and then plays back all of the stored name tags When the list is complete the system returns to the main menu Deleting Name Tags The system uses the following commands to delete name tags Delete Delete all name tags Using the Delete Command The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted To use the delete command 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Delete The system responds with Delete please say the name tag followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag to be deleted The system responds with Would you like to delete lt name tag gt Please say yes or no Ifthe name tag is correct say Yes to delete the name tag The system responds with OK deleting name tag returning to the main menu Ifthe name tag is incorrect say No The system responds with No OK let s try again please say the name tag
122. the camera lens Clean the lens rinse it with water and wipe it with a soft cloth The back of the vehicle is in an accident the position and mounting angle of the camera can change or the camera can be affected Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer retailer There are extreme temperature changes The rear vision camera system display in the rearview mirror may turn off or not appear as expected due to one of the following conditions If this occurs the left indicator light on the mirror will flash A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal or no video signal present during the reverse cycle Afast flash may indicate that the display has been on for the maximum allowable time during a reverse cycle or the display has reached an Over Temperature limit The fast flash conditions are used to protect the video device from high temperature conditions Once conditions return to normal the device will reset and the green indicator will stop flashing During any of these fault conditions the display will be blank and the indicator will continue to flash as long as the vehicle is in R Reverse or until the conditions return to normal Pressing and holding when the left indicator light is flashing will turn off the video display along with the left indicator light 2 63 OnStar System OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide
123. the disc depending on the number of MP3 WMA files recorded to the CD R or CD RW To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label or eject the disc The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R or CD RW begins playing again 8 111 Once the disc has been scanned the player defaults to playing MPS WMA files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows To listen to MPS WMA files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow button The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed To change from playback by artist to playback by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen Now the album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begin to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD R or CD RW and begins playing MP3 WMA files from that album To exit music navigator mode press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 WMA playba
124. the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location is recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR GM will not access this data or share it with others except with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request of police or similar government office as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or as required by law Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner OnStar If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use See also OnStar System on page 2 64 in this manual for more information Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system use of the syste
125. the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Assistance Program For U S purchased vehicles call 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Text telephone TTY 1 888 889 2438 For Canadian purchased vehicles call 1 800 268 6800 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance have the following information ready Your name home address and home telephone number Telephone number of your location Location of the vehicle Model year color and license plate number of the vehicle Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km whichever comes first In the U S anyone driving the vehicle is covered In Canada a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification 7 8 GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to a
126. the desired position then release the lever to lock the seatback in place 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked To return the seatback to an upright position do the following 1 Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position 2 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked Power Reclining Seatbacks Center Seat Your vehicle may have a front center seat The seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder storage area for the driver and passenger when the center seat is not used Do not use it as a seating position when the seatback is folded down Rear Seats Heated Seats On vehicles with rear outboard heated seats the buttons used to control this feature are located on If the seats have power reclining seatbacks the control the Rear Seat Audio RSA used to recline them is located on the outboard side panel of the seat behind the power seat control To recline the seatback tilt the top of the control rearward To bring the seatback forward tilt the top of the control forward Driver Side RSA Heated Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is Seat Button shown moving W Heated Seat To heat the seat cushion press the button with the heated seat symbol A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature se
127. the headlamp control to the off position again will turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on For vehicles first sold in Canada the off position will only work for vehicles that are shifted into the P Park position AUTO Automatic Automatically turns on the headlamps at normal brightness together with the following e Parking Lamps Instrument Panel Lights Taillamps License Plate Lamps 39 Parking Lamps Turns on the parking lamps together with the following Instrument Panel Lights Taillamps License Plate Lamps D Headlamps Turns on the headlamps together with the following lamps listed below Parking Lamps nstrument Panel Lights Taillamps License Plate Lamps 3 15 When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on the headlamps will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to prevent the battery from being drained Turn the headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp on position to make the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes Headlamps on Reminder A reminder chime will sound when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and the ignition is off and a door is open To disable the chime turn the light off Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make
128. the ignition was last turned on This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of miles mi or kilometers km driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage For example if the vehicle was driven 5 miles 8 km before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 5 miles 8 km As the vehicle begins moving the display will then increase to 5 1 miles 8 2 km 5 2 miles 8 4 km etc Transmission Temperature Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP displays This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C Trailer Gain and Output On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system the trailer brake display appears in the DIC Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting This setting can be adjusted from 0 0 to 10 0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected To adjust this setting see Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for more information OUTPUT shows the pow
129. the vehicle serviced Notice Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 37 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice f the engine catches fire while driving with no coolant the vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 37 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment ZN CAUTION Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop the engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 37 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency 5 35 If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message along with a low coolant condition can indicate a serious problem If an engine ov
130. the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery The vehicle s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches 8 to 13 cm about one eighth turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing Passing another vehicle on a two lane road can be dangerous To reduce the risk of danger while passing Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass If in doubt wait Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection Never cross a solid or double solid line on your side of the lane Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass Doing so can reduce your visibility Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle When you are being passed ease to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes stee
131. tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 80 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load For information on recommended tire pressure see nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 5 63 B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria roo SPEC 2012 Ms Specification Original equipment tires designed g46 E 1207 to GM s specific tire performance criteria have AT XX PSI Co 78s a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall D S GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all Y DOT Mat Oe a to s Q federal safety guidelines C Dual Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 M 45 me oF A Be re e Xe aa Sy 397 Loy 4nw Ay F o
132. tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations What is the distance that will be travelled Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow Is the proper towing equipment going to be used See your dealer retailer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations Is the vehicle ready to be towed Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4 27 Dinghy Towing Notice f the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground the drivetrain components could Two Wheel Drive Vehicles be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed 4 45 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a four wheel drive vehicle 1 Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow vehicle and shift the transmission to P Park 2 Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking brake 3 Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle 4 46 A CAUTION Shifting a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park The
133. trailer See Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for more information 4 51 Towing a Trailer Do not tow a trailer during break in See New Vehicle Break In on page 2 24 for more information A CAUTION The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all The driver and passengers could be seriously injured The vehicle may also be damaged the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed Ask your dealer retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle 4 52 Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this section and see your dealer retailer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly The followi
134. transmitters to your vehicle To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle 1 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays 2 Press the set reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed 3 Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds On vehicles with memory recall seats the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2 A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 4 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it 5 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK OFF Compass Zone Setting This display allows for setting the compass zone See DIC Compass on page 3 61 Compass Recalibration This display allows for calibrating the compass See DIC Compass on page 3 61 Blank Display This display shows no information DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons the information below explains the operation of this system The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also turn off or acknowledge DIC messages The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information and warning messa
135. uncompressed CD audio CDA and MP3 files a folder under the root directory called CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder function does not display on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists 3 104 When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and up buttons search playlists Px first and then goes to the root folder Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R or CD RW are played in the following order Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play ent
136. vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts If the engine does not start and the key is held in START for many seconds cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF position Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to let the cranking motor cool down 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below O F or 18 C it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing This clears the
137. vehicle s transfer case into N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park The driver or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N Neutral 5 Shift the transfer case to N Neutral See Shifting into N Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 37 6 Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer s instructions Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four wheel drive vehicle from the front 7 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the vehicle dolly manufacturer s instructions i 8 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF After towing see Shifting Out of N Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 37 2 Drive the front wheels onto the dolly 3 Shift the transmission to P Park 4 Firmly set the parking brake 4 48 Rear Towing Rear Wheels Off the Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Ground Use the following procedure to dolly tow a two wheel drive vehicle from the rear 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly 3 Firmly set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 42 4 Put the transmission in P Park 5 Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer s instructio
138. while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission does not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough For a Hydra Matic 6 Speed transmission this position reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes You can use it for major severe downgrades and off road driving where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade When you shift to 1 First it provides the lowest gear appropriate to the vehicle s current road speed and continues to downshift as the vehicle slows eventually downshifting to 1 First gear Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place Range Selection Mode Hydra Matic 6 Speed Transmission Base trim shown uplevel similar The vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode The Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle s transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range of gears 2 33 To use this feature do the following 1 Move the shift lever to M Manual Mode 2 Press the plus minus buttons located on the steering column shift lever to select the desired range of gears for the current driving conditions When M Manual Mode is s
139. will change to show the current temperature s and AUTO will be lit on the display The current delivery mode and fan speed will also be displayed for approximately 5 seconds When AUTO is selected the air conditioning operation and air inlet will be automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor will run when the outside temperature is over about 40 F 4 C The air inlet will normally be set to outside air If it is hot outside the air inlet may automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down the vehicle The light on the button comes on in recirculation 2 Set the driver s and passenger s temperature To find your comfort setting start with a 74 F 23 C temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Use the driver s or passenger s temperature buttons to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If a temperature setting of 60 F 15 C is chosen the system remains at the maximum cooling setting If a temperature setting of 90 F 32 C is chosen the system remains at the maximum heat setting Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster Do not to cover the solar sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and also turns on the headlamps For more information on the solar sensor see Sensors later in this section To avoid blow
140. write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue S E Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from safercar gov Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect notify Transport Canada immediately in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited Call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this please notify General Motors Call 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 or write GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 In Canada call 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle
141. your comfort setting by adjusting the outlet temperature fan speed and the air delivery mode The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures Outlet Adjustment Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side of the instrument panel to direct the airflow Operation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of the windows When you enter a vehicle in cold weather press the fan up button to the maximum fan level before driving This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of the window Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout the vehicle Adding outside equipment to the front of the vehicle such as hood air deflectors may affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System For vehicles with this system the rear controls are three knobs located in the headliner The system can also be controlled with the front controls A Fan Control B Temperature Control C Air Deliv
142. 0 40 Split Bench Seat Second Row 1 14 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 1 88 Bucket Seats Second Row 1 20 How Does an Airbag Restrain 1 88 Third Row S at ainetun 1 27 What Will You See After an Safety Belts sses 1 32 Airbag Inflates eeceeceeeeee eee eteeees 1 88 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 1 32 Passenger Sensing System ssssess 1 90 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 37 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 96 Lap Shoulder Belt ee 1 45 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 52 VOMIGIG e 1 96 Lap Belege ra E Soveticiis 1 52 Restraint System Check 1 1 98 Safety Belt Extender sssseeesess 1 53 Checking the Restraint Systems 1 98 Child Restraints 00000ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 54 Replacing Restraint System Parts Older Children ccccccccccceeessseeeceeeceesssaeeees 1 54 After a Crash csissssnnsaisactinnsnstinnseesanteanenginis 1 99 Infants and Young Children 1 57 Head Restraints The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions A CAUTION With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck
143. 0 kg 5 700 Ibs 2 586 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 216 kg 8 200 Ibs 3 720 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 8 100 Ibs 3 674 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 1500 Series 4WD Long Wheel Base 6 0L V8 9 600 Ibs 4 355 kg 16 000 Ibs 7 257 kg 2500 Series 4WD Long Wheel Base 6 0L V8 9 300 Ibs 4 218 kg 16 000 Ibs 7 257 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded Ask your dealer retailer for our trailering information or advice or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 6 for more information Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo carried in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If there are a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in the vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow If towing a trailer the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight too See for more information about the vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 56 The trailer tongue weight A should be 1
144. 0 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B up toa maximum of 600 Ibs 272 kg with a weight carrying hitch or up to a maximum of 1 000 Ibs 453 kg with a weight distributing hitch For more information see Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches later in this section Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle After loading the trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they are not adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer Trailering may be limited by the vehicle s ability to carry tongue weight Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or the RGAWR Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating The effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight Consider the following example A vehicle model base weight is 5 500 Ibs 2 495 kg 2 800 Ibs 1 270 kg at the front axle and 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg at the rear axle It has a GVWR of 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg a RGAWR of 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg and a GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The trailer rating should be 14 000 Ibs 6350 kg 5 500 Ibs 2495 kg GC
145. 1 81 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 2 eoi aceto ui boc ies ST 1 96 How Does an Airbag Restrain 1 88 Passenger Sensing System 1 90 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 96 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 1 88 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 88 When Should an Airbag Inflate 1 86 Where Are the Airbags sssssesesesse 1 83 Airbags Passenger Status Indicator 3 38 Antenna Rear Side Window sseeess 3 138 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna System sesesesne 3 138 Antilock Brake System ABS sssssss 4 5 Warning Eight error bet Pocta recie 3 42 Appearance Care Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 112 Care of Safety Belts ssssssssss 5 109 Chemical Paint Spotting ssssss 5 113 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 5 110 Fabhic Carpet i2 cnc rnae aini 5 108 Finish Canes iccidaccnehaeonnctrdaeneuabetagobndenensiend 5 110 Finish Damages ssivis ctestscsetier i hieinndsleeiins 5 113 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces siecia airina eas 5 109 Interior Cleaning sese 5 106 Leather i iiem t epe repost obese cand 5 108 Sheet Metal Damage sssessesse 5 113 TILES icerum Mee
146. 2009 GMC Yukon Yukon XL Owner Manual M Seats and Restraint System 1 1 Object Detection Systems 2 53 Head Restraints scerscsanirniuirmirensiirania 1 2 OnStar System 2 64 Front Seats scc cioe cie Er ei 1 4 Universal Home Remote System 2 67 Hear Seals uses rie ot edi eiai 1 13 Storage Areas eRR 2 74 ua azascicecsanacsadliniseacanteenesantianeass 1 32 Sunroof sse 2 77 Child Restraints eseeeemmRR 1 54 Instrument Panel eRRR ee 3 1 Airbag System E E T dt ada ole mi doti sa Pide 1 81 Instrument Panel Overview 3 4 Restraint System Check esse 1 98 Climate Controls c cccseecssceseceeeeeneceeeees 3 22 Features and Controls ssssssss 2 1 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 34 Keys xor iom Lu nncabocke stot EL este 2 3 Driver Information Center DIC 3 51 Doors and Locks eene 2 10 Audio System s ssssssseeRRe 3 83 Windows operieren nearne rni 2 18 Driving Your Vehicle 4 1 Theft Deterrent Systems sssssss 2 20 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle 4 2 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 24 poop ETE DHT 4 44 Muro 2 48 Service and Appearance Care 5 1 Appearance Care sssssse 5 106 ECIUDI
147. 34 Rear Seat Entertainment System 3 125 Rear Side Window Antenna ssss 3 138 Rear Storage nasisi iaaea e rape ROMA ee LER 2 76 Rear Vision Camera RVC sssssssss 2 59 Rear Window Washer Wiper esses 3 11 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming 2 48 Rearview MirrOrS sr eet ettet tah 2 48 Reclining Seatbacks sse 1 10 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 13 Recovery HOOKS eet ottenere res 4 32 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4 44 Reimbursement Program GM Mobility 7 7 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 2 4 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation e 2 5 Remote Vehicle Start ssseessesesse 2 7 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare iE 5 91 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 87 Replacement Bulbs eeeeeeseeseees 5 58 Replacement Parts Maintenance 6 15 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 7 15 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government sss 7 15 12 Reporting Safety Defects to the U S Government ssseeee 7 14 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems 1 98 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ioi etae 1 99 Retained Accessory Power RAP
148. 5 3 Vehicle Identification sssssus 5 114 gll a a M 5 5 Electrical System oo ee eeeeeceeceecneeeeeeeeneeaes 5 114 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 12 Capacities and Specifications 5 122 Rear Axle sss eee eee 5 49 Maintenance Schedule ene 6 1 Four Wheel Drive eenmmRI 5 51 Maintenance Schedule L 6 2 Front Axle METER LLL LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLZC 5 52 Customer Assistance Information xam 74 Headlamp Aiming ssessssesesssse 5 53 Customer Assistance and Information 72 Bulb Replacement m 5 56 Reporting Safety Defects 7 14 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 59 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 7 16 Uc c r 5 61 A ideaceaseeste sietcees 1 GM GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem GMC the GMC Truck Emblem and the name YUKON are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed GM reserves the right to make changes after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for GMC wherever it appears in this manual This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about the vehicle s features and controls Pictures symbols and wor
149. 6 7 Maintenance Record ssseeseess 6 17 6 1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements the vehicle warranties See the Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer retailer for details Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from the vehicle To help protect the environment and to keep the vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain the vehicle properly Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help keep this vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You might drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you might drive long distances all the time
150. 76 Rear Seat Armrest ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tented 2 76 Gago COVEN i e eoe ete tat dk tus aa ds 2 76 SuntroOf cio nera trustee del pee ua 2 77 Keys A CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children The key is used for the ignition and all door locks The key has a bar coded key tag that the dealer retailer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys Store this information in a safe place not in the vehicle See your dealer retailer if a replacement key or additional key is needed Notice f you ever lock your keys in the vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys If you are locked out of the vehicle call the Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System The Remote Keyless Entry RKE system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions
151. 9 Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often Notice Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle Check the cleaning product label If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight Use a car washing soap Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives as they can damage the paint metal or plastic on the vehicle Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer Follow all manufacturers directions regarding correct product usage necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product Rinse the vehicle well before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely If they are allowed to dry on the surface they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting 5 110 High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches 30 cm to the surface of the vehicle Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft c
152. ANLO sr C13 C42C52 C83 3 cs s E ER C122 C183 C143 e FAN CNTRL a 173 o E189 C183 20 C22 ts 24 230263027 C28 Cee 3 309031 f NC m C313 B PRK 22 e fea u C33 E ss C33 C31 S s Ll jen 8 eex sJ v Jte 3 503C51J 523C53 e cats e e C40 O TP CBIC Je C483 49 54JC55 RUN C56 Right Trailer Stop Turn Lamp Electronic Stability Suspension 2 Control Automatic Level Control Exhaust Left Trailer Stop Turn Lamp Engine Controls 5 Engine Control Module Throttle Control 6 Trailer Brake Controler 8 Oxygen Sensors 9 Antilock Brakes System 13 Fuel Injectors Ignition Coils Right Side 14 Transmission Control Module Battery Vehicle Back up Lamps Headlamp 5 119 5 120 sage Left Side Passenger Side High Beam Headlamp Driver Side High Beam Headlamp Daytime Running Lamps 2 Daytime Running Lamps DRL Key Ignition System Theft Deterrent System Fuses Usage Amplifier Audio System Miscellaneous Ignition Cruise Control Liftgate Release Airbag System Battery Instrument Panel Cluster Not Used Auxiliary Climate Control Ignition Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL Rear Defogger Heated Mirrors SEO B1 Upfitter Usage Battery Cigarette Lighter Auxiliary Power Outlet 54 Automatic Level Control Compressor Relay Climate Controls Ignition Engine Control Module Secondary Fuel Pump Ignition
153. AR or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be checked You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time press the set reset button or the trip odometer reset stem If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires on page 5 61 Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 The DIC also shows the tire pressure values See DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons earlier in this section If the tire pressure is low the low tire pressure warning light comes on See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 43 CHECK TRAILER WIRING On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system this message may display and a chime may sound when one of the following conditions exists Atrailer with electric brakes becomes disconnected from the vehicle Ifthe disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stopped this message clears itself after a short time f the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving this message stays on until the ignition is turned off There is a short in the wiring to the electric trailer brakes When this message displays power is no longer available to the trailer brakes As soon as it is safe to do so carefully pull your vehicle over to the si
154. AUTION Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline do not drive across it Find another route instead A hill that can be driven straight up or down might be too steep to drive across When going straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when driving across an incline the narrower track width the distance between the left and right wheels might not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels which could cause a downhill slide or a rollover 4 22 Surface conditions can be a problem Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause the tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rOCk a rut etc and roll over Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression the vehicle can tilt even more For these reasons carefully consider whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try
155. C buttons for more than five seconds The oil life will change to 100 If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started the Engine Oil Life System has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for the location of the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 80 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information If driving on dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the engi
156. DELLI E UE etter 5 112 Underbody Maintenance esses 5 113 Washing Your Vehicle sesssssse 5 110 Weatherstrips cceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 109 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 111 Aslhtray o iiiaae EE A ddan eeetaenae 3 22 Assistance Program Roadside 7 7 Audio System ececec eee neeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 83 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 3 136 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual 3 114 Setting the Clock sees 3 84 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 138 Audio System s ssssA 3 86 Audio Systems Radio Reception Eten 3 137 Rear Seat RSA seseeeeeeeesess 3 134 Theft Deterrent Feature ss 3 136 Automatic Headlamp System 3 17 Automatic Transmission aluo t PETAT 5 21 5 24 i9 e run Pm 2 29 Autoride cesset tied tems Lo E 4 51 Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp eeseeesees 3 18 Axle Rear siis ccc cccc cece ec eee ee ec ec meteran ni iienaa danis 5 49 Battery ene eoe eA eri MEME 5 43 Electric Power Management 3 20 Run Down Protection ueeeeesessese 3 21 Belt Routing Engine esses 6 16 Bench Seat Split 60 40 sssssss 1 14
157. Dimming Mirror eesseeesese 2 51 Convex Mirror sss 2 52 Heated Mintors elei redes 2 52 Manual Mirrors 0c0cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 2 49 Power Foldaway Mirrors eeeseeesese 2 50 Power Minors nice ree hte aiias 2 50 TOWING MirTOrS 1 acorde need 2 49 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode seem 5 37 Owner Checks and Services ssuuss 6 9 Owners Canadian ccccceceeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeees iii Paint Damage eit 5 113 Park Shifting Into iore eee eet 2 44 SUING QUE Of aieiaa tecti etur rient imn tee 2 45 Park Ald sidane aene reta mese os igi A i petu 2 53 Park Tilt MIIfOIS eoi i Leto neu terre tend 2 51 Parking ASSIST EE 2 53 Over Things That Burn ssessesssss 2 46 Parking Brake sissit iisa tiesedenteesdegeneenags 2 42 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 38 Passenger Sensing System sssss 1 90 PASSING RM 4 11 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 2 22 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation sesssem e 2 23 Perchlorate Materials Requirements erihienraeme E ER 5 4 Phone Bl etoOlli codeine per bee E bna 3 114 Power Door LOCKS A belies ite rei siluis 2 10 Electrical System eeeeessesseses 5 115 lorc sete Eienescleihcancatsadacsgiedenaedsaesgiaenneee 2 14 Lumbar Controls e
158. ED message is displayed an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a loss in power and engine performance This operating mode allows the vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency Driving extended miles km and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil on page 5 15 Engine Fan Noise If the vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan when the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages so you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
159. EEL DRIVE This message displays if a problem occurs with the four wheel drive system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Make sure the key is in the LOCK OFF position for at least one minute and then restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the four wheel drive system needs service See your dealer retailer SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system Have your dealer retailer inspect the system for problems See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 37 and Airbag System on page 1 81 for more information SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system Under certain conditions the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster See Charging System Light on page 3 39 Driving with this problem could drain the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible See your dealer retailer SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brake system See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 40 If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the
160. F ON 2 AN NIA United States Canada When the vehicle is started the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance if equipped you may not see the system check 3 38 Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing System has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag If after several seconds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer retailer for service A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 37 for more information including important safety information Charging System Light This light com
161. If your vehicle has the optional 20 inch P275 55R20 size tires they are classified as touring tires and are designed for on road use The low profile wide tread design is not recommended for off road driving See Off Road Driving on page 4 12 for additional information Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall The following illustrations are examples of a typical P Metric and a LT Metric tire sidewall 5 62 TPC SPEC 1153 yg 75 Dy avon wwe ayo m da VA i Mov HL og uv Passenger P Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code
162. It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice f the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put the automatic transmission in P Park or a manual transmission in N Neutral before setting the parking brake If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral Notice f you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not needed This avoids sparks and helps save both batteries And it could save the radio 4 Open the hood on the
163. Make sure playlists have a m3u extension as other file extensions might not work 3 108 Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playlist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists could cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions To play a large number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display potentially getting cut off Finalize the audio disc before burning it Trying to add music to an existing disc could cause the disc not to function in the player Root Directory The root directory of the CD R or CD RW is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files are locate
164. Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain Tips for driving in these conditions include Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape Check all fluid levels and brakes tires cooling System and transmission Going down steep or long hills shift to a lower gear ZN CAUTION If you do not shift down the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope 4 28 A CAUTION Coasting downhill in N Neutral or with the ignition off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear when going downhill Stay in your own lane Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane Top of hills Be alert something could be in your lane stalled car accident Pay attention to special road signs falling rocks area winding roads long grades passing or no passing zones and take appropriate action See Off Road Driving on page 4 12 for information about driving off road Winter Driving Driving on Snow or I
165. OOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low If there is a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 5 34 5 29 What to Use A CAUTION Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will The vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 5 30 Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOLS coolant If using this mixture nothing else needs to be added This mixture e Gives freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C outside temperature Gives boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C engine temperature Protects against rust and corrosion Will not damage aluminum parts Helps keep the proper engine temperature Notice f an improper coolant mixture is used the engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and
166. RUCK COLD TIRE PRESSURE XXXKPA XXPSI XXXKPA XXPSI E INFORMATION a United States AV F XXX LB T XXXLB Ra ph Ranges COLD TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION A FROID XXXXXXXX XXPSl XXXXXXXX XXPSI J Canada 4 41 In order to calculate the amount of weight any front accessory such as a snow plow is adding to the front axle use the following formula W x A W B W B Weight the accessory is adding to the front axle Where W Weight of added accessory A Distance that the accessory is in front of the front axle W B Vehicle Wheelbase 4 42 For example adding a 700 Ib 318 kg snow plow actually adds more than 700 lbs 318 kg to the front axle Using the formula if the snow plow is 4 ft 122 cm in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft 305 cm then W 700 Ib 318 kg A 4 ft 122 cm W B 10 ft 305 cm W x A W B W B 700 x 4 10 10 980 Ibs 445 kg So if your vehicle s front axle reserve capacity is more than 980 Ibs 445 kg you could add the snow plow without exceeding the front GAWR You can add heavier equipment on the front of the vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer passengers less cargo or by positioning cargo towards the rear This has the effect of reducing the load on the front However the front GAWR rear GAWR and the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR must never
167. Safety Belt ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 53 Exterior Lamps creeni a n Ee ERa 3 15 Filter Engine Air Cleaner seeeeeeesssse 5 19 Finish Damage er pis iieiaei k 5 113 Flashers Hazard Warning sseseeeses 3 6 Flashsto Pass i pee rte eu e Eo Erai 3 8 Flat Tire Er o e a E O ETET 5 85 Flat Tire Changing ee 5 86 Flat Tire Storing ccceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 5 102 Fluid Automatic Transmission 5 21 5 24 Power Steering sssee 5 38 Windshield Washer sessssssssssess 5 39 Fog Lamp gom 3 18 Fog Lamp Lighten soit intend 3 49 Four Wheel Drive seeseeseesse 2 37 5 51 Front AX ed 5 52 Uc REPE 5 5 AddiilV6s 3 tacens tint even eui E ERE ien a 5 6 California Fuel 5 tenete 5 6 E85 8596 Ethanol 5 tree 5 7 Economy Driving acra tne ette 4 2 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 5 11 Filling the Man 2er coni eae 5 9 Fuels in Foreign Countries ceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 8 GAO REP EE 3 50 Gasoline Octane sese 5 5 Gasoline Specifications esses 5 6 Low Fuel Warning Light ssssssss 3 51 Fuel Management Active sssssssssssse 2 29 Fuses Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 5 117 Fuses and Circuit Breakers
168. Safety Belt Reminders Q Tire Pressure Monitor E Tow Haul Mode Traction Control Sw Windshield Washer Fluid 42 NOTES vi Section 1 Seats and Restraint System Head Restraints e cc ceeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Child Restraint Systems esses 1 61 Front Seats ssssssRRRRRRe 1 4 Where to Put the Restraint ssssssussss 1 64 Manual Seats eee 1 4 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children Power Seats ccccecceecececesesesesesesesesssseeeeeeeees 1 5 LATCH ss Hem 1 66 Man al Lumbar sieisen aoo os ere A 1 6 Securing a Child Restraint in a Power Lumbar 2 5 Jococcsctecssecsssnlacsvorcesicoutoanne 1 6 Rear Seat Position iecoris retirees 1 73 Heated Seats esce obire ene te incetelaniebaleans 1 7 Securing a Child Restraint in the Heated and Cooled Seats eeeereeeeees 1 8 Center Front Seat Position 1 77 Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals 1 8 Securing a Child Restraint in the Reclining Seatbacks re 1 10 Right Front Seat Position ssssse 1 78 Center Seat ccccccccceccc ec eceeeeeeeeeeeneneaeaeaes 1 13 Airbag System cccccceec eee eceeeeeeeeeee seers 1 81 Rear Seats epi Ca eR EE a eds 1 13 Where Are the Airbags sssseees 1 83 Heated Seats sssssssee e 1 13 When Should an Airbag Inflate 1 86 6
169. Snow Plow or Similar Equipment Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle here are some things you will need to know Notice f your vehicle does not have the snow plow prep package adding a plow can damage your vehicle and the repairs would not be covered by warranty Unless your vehicle was built to carry a snow plow do not add one to your vehicle If your vehicle has the snow plow prep package called RPO VYU then the payload your vehicle can carry will be reduced when a snow plow is installed Your vehicle can be damaged if either the front or rear axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle Weight GVW are exceeded Some vehicles are built with a special snow plow prep package called RPO VYU If your vehicle has this option you can add a plow to it provided certain weights such as the weights on the vehicle s axles and the Gross Vehicle Weight GVW are not exceeded 4 40 The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many things such as The options your vehicle came with and the weight of those options The weight and number of passengers you intend to carry The weight of items you have added to your vehicle The total weight of any additional cargo you intend to carry Say for example you have a 700 Ib 318 kg snow plow The total weight of all occupants and cargo inside the cab should not exceed 300 Ib 135 kg This means that you may only be able to carry one passenger But even this may be to
170. TEM message is displayed while driving the vehicle power is no longer available to the trailer brakes When traffic conditions allow carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on If either of these messages continues either the vehicle or trailer needs service An authorized dealer retailer may be able to diagnose and repair problems with the trailer However any diagnosis and repair of the trailer is not covered under the vehicle warranty Please contact your trailer dealer for assistance with trailer repairs and trailer warranty information 4 67 Driving with a Trailer ZN CAUTION When towing a trailer exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window is open Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death To maximize safety when towing a trailer Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting a trip Never drive with the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window open Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxi
171. The system will ask for the name tag to be re entered Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Using the Re dial Command 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Re dial The system responds with Re dial using phone name gt and dials the last number called from the connected Bluetooth phone Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Receiving a Call When an incoming call is received the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle Press amp and begin speaking to answer the call Press V to ignore a call Call Waiting Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work Press to answer an incoming call when another call is active The original call is placed on hold Press t again to return to the original call To ignore the incoming call continue with the original call with no action Press Cx V to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold Three Way Calling Three Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work 1 While on a call press amp The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Three way call The system responds with Three way call p
172. This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the set reset button for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of miles mi or kilometers km driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage For example if the vehicle was driven 5 miles 8 km before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 5 miles 8 km As the vehicle begins moving the display will then increase to 5 1 miles 8 2 km 5 2 miles 8 4 km etc 3 53 Fuel Range Press the trip fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles mi or kilometers km the vehicle can be driven without refueling The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank This estimate will change if driving conditions change For example if driving in traffic and making frequent stops this display may read one number but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Genera
173. Tire Quality Grading 5 80 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 82 Wheel Replacement esee 5 82 When It Is Time for New Tires 5 77 Tow Haul Mode sisremare cen esten 2 35 Tow Haul Mode Light eseeesessse 3 49 Towing Recreational Vehicle eseeeeeeeeeereeees 4 44 Towing a Traller 1 uice t re nete 4 52 Trailer Recommendations ssssse 4 73 YOUR le m 4 44 Traction StabiliTrak System eeeeeseeeeeeeeees 4 6 Trailer Towing Recommendations sssse 4 73 Transmission Fluid Automatic esses 5 21 5 24 Transmission Operation Automatic 2 29 Transportation Program Courtesy 7 10 Trip Odometer cci cete reme eterne 3 36 Turn and Lane Change Signals 3 7 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever sssss 3 7 U Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 2 53 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 5 80 Universal Home Remote System 2 67 aucun D 2 68 Vehicle COMMON E ERE TET TTE 4 3 fool onena a 4 33 Running While Parked eese 2 47 SM cem iv Vehicle Customization DIC eese 3 74 Vehicle Data Recording and Privac
174. V8 engine Code 0 the 5 3L V8 engine Code 3 or the 6 2L V8 engine Code 2 you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel on page 5 5 In all other engines use only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 Only vehicles that have the 5 3L V8 engine Code 0 the 5 3L V8 engine Code 3 or the 6 2L V8 engine Code 2 can use 85 ethanol fuel E85 We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it The ethanol in E85 is a renewable fuel meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn and other crops Many service stations will not have an 85 ethanol fuel E85 pump available The U S Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website www eere energy gov afdc infrastructure locator html that can help you find E85 fuel Those stations that do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85 At a minimum E85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798 By definition this means that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between 70 and 85 Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on To ensure quick starts in the wintertime the E85 fuel must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798 If you h
175. WR Vehicle Weight 8 500 Ibs 3855 kg Trailer Rating Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight 850 Ibs 386 kg and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle the effect on the rear axle is greater than just the weight itself as much as 1 5 times as much The weight at the rear axle could be 850 Ibs 386 kg X 1 5 1 275 Ibs 578 kg Since the rear axle already weighs 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg adding 1 275 lbs 578 kg brings the total to 3 975 lbs 1 803 kg This is very close to but within the limit for RGAWR as well The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8 500 Ibs 3 856 kg If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well 300 lbs 136 kg could be added to the front axle weight and 400 Ibs 181 kg to the rear axle weight The vehicle now weighs 2 800 Ibs 1270kg 2 700 Ibs 1225kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Front 400 Ibs 181 kg Rear 6 200 Ibs 2812 kg Total Weight is still below 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg and you might think 700 additional pounds 318 kg should be subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits The maximum trailer would only be 7 800 Ibs 3 538 kg You may go further and think the tongue weight should be limited to less than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg to avoid exceeding GVWR But the effect on the rear axle must still be considered 4 57 Because the
176. ZN CAUTION Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 5 44 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Infrequent Usage If the vehicle is driven infrequently remove the black negative cable from the battery This helps keep the battery from running down Extended Storage For extended storage of the vehicle remove the black negative cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger This helps maintain the charge of the battery over an extended period of time 5 43 Jump Starting If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information If the vehicle s battery or batteries has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely A CAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you 5 44 Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage the vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle
177. a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle judgment muscular coordination vision and attentiveness Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with about 250 000 people injured For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving brakes steering and accelerator At times as when driving on
178. a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 1 78 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child ina forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 90 for additional information If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 66 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers
179. a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays RDM Random With the random setting MP3 files on the CD R or CD RW can be listened to in random rather than sequential order on one CD R or CD RW or all discs in a six disc CD player To use random do one of the following 1 To play MP3 files from the CD R or CD RW in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play 2 To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six disc CD player in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play 3 106 Music Navigator Use the music navigator feature to play MP3 files on the CD R or CD RW in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It could take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD R or CD RW The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R or CD RW begins playing again Once the disc has scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display be
180. accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 Side Blind Zone Alert If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system this display allows the system to be turned on or off Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ON or OFF If you choose ON the system will be turned on If you choose OFF the system will be turned off When the SBZA system is turned off the DIC will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF message as a reminder that the system has been turned off See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 and Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA on page 2 55 for more information 3 55 Units Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units All of the vehicle information will then be displayed in the unit of measurement selected Tire Pressure On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa Press the vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT
181. ad signs posted speed limits or signal lights Use good judgment about what is safe and what is not Driving on Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot do There are some hills that simply cannot be driven no matter how well built the vehicle A CAUTION Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you cannot control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness do not drive the hill Approaching a Hill Driving Uphill When you approach a hill decide if it is too steep to Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard s to judge On a very small hill for example there may be 55 4 OW dar ANA dete Nim Np On ne steering a smooth constant incline with only a small change in WEE elevation where you can easily see all the way to Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as speed Not using more power than needed can you near the top but you might not see this because the avoid spinning the wheels or sliding crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Consider this as you approach a hill 3 s there a constant
182. ad the bad battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle 5 Return the remote positive terminal cover if the vehicle has one to its original position Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during production They are not filled to reach a certain level When checking the fluid level on any axle variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill differences between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume Also if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the fluid level it may appear lower than normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained back to the sump area Therefore a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an hour or two Remember that the rear axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading 5 49 How to Check Lubricant 2500 Series 5 50 1500 Series To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a le
183. additional ten minutes are considered a second remote vehicle start Once two remote starts or a single remote start with one time extension has been done the vehicle must be started with the key After the key is removed from the ignition the vehicle can be remote started again The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the ignition the hood is not closed or if there is an emission control system malfunction and the check engine light comes on Also the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil pressure gets low Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start system enabled The system may be enabled or disabled through the DIC See REMOTE START under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 for additional information If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons see your dealer retailer to enable or disable the remote vehicle start system Remote Start Ready If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start feature it may have the remote start ready feature This feature allows your dealer retailer to add the manufacturer s remote vehicle start feature See your dealer retailer if you would like to add the manufacturer s remote vehicle start feature to your vehicle Doors and Locks Door Locks A CAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passe
184. age See footnote j boe Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator if equipped If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 19 See footnote I Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 76 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 6 10 Inspect brake system See footnote a Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services in this section Inspect suspension and steering components See footnote b a ioe Inspect engine cooling system See footnote c Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service I or II after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 80 000 oen 000 KLG 000 20000 000 een 000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks be gt Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Vehicles without a filter restriction indicator Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 19 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter severe service See footnote h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter normal service Four wh
185. ages see Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 51 A ee The StabiliTrak light will flash on the instrument panel cluster when the system is both on and activated The system may be heard or felt while it is working this is normal The traction control disable button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls V e9 e The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if both systems traction control and StabiliTrak were previously on To disable both traction control and StabiliTrak press and hold the button for five seconds Traction control and StabiliTrak can be turned on by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if not automatically shut off for any other reason When the TCS or StabiliTrak system is turned off the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate TCS off or StabiliTrak off message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the driver The vehicle will still have brake traction control when traction control is off but will not be able to use the engine speed management system See Traction Control Operation next for more information When the traction control system has been turned off system noises may still be heard as a result of the brake traction control coming on It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in san
186. ake Apply lever Adjusting trailer gain at speeds lower than 20 to 25 mph 32 to 40 km h may result in an incorrect gain setting 6 Adjust the Trailer Gain to just below the point of trailer wheel lock up indicated by trailer wheel squeal or tire smoke when a trailer wheel locks Trailer wheel lock up may not occur if towing a heavily loaded trailer In this case adjust the Trailer Gain to the highest allowable setting for the towing condition 7 Re adjust Trailer Gain any time vehicle loading trailer loading or road surface conditions change or if trailer wheel lock up is noticed at any time while towing 4 66 Other ITBC Related DIC Messages In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT through the DIC trailer connection and ITBC system status is displayed in the DIC TRAILER CONNECTED This message will be briefly displayed when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle This message will automatically turn off in about ten seconds The driver can also acknowledge this message before it automatically turns off CHECK TRAILER WIRING This message will be displayed if 1 The ITBC system first determines connection to a trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stationary this message will automatically turn off in about thirty seconds This message will also turn off if the dr
187. ake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped have the vehicle towed for service If the light comes on while driving pull off the road and stop carefully The pedal might be harder to push or might go closer to the floor It can take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 44 8 41 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System ABS this light comes on briefly when the engine is started If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the ABS light stays on turn the ignition off If the light comes on while driving stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the ABS light stays on or comes on again while driving the vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not on the vehicle still has brakes but not antilock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 40 For vehicles wit
188. all near the tire size If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5 62 for additional information GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 76 for information on proper tire rotation A CAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle might not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types could also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size brand and type tires on all wheels Your vehicle may have a different size spare than the road tires those originally installed on your vehicle When new your vehicle included a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall diameter as your vehicle s road tires and wheels so it is all right to drive on it Because this spare was developed for use on your vehicle it will not affect vehicle handling A CAUTION If you use bias ply tires on the vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of dri
189. allows the engine to operate on either all or half of its cylinders depending on the driving conditions When less power is required such as cruising at a constant vehicle speed the system will operate in the half cylinder mode allowing the vehicle to achieve better fuel economy When greater power demands are required such as accelerating from a stop passing or merging onto a freeway the system will maintain full cylinder operation If your vehicle has an Active Fuel Management indicator see DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 52 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 57 for more information on using this display Automatic Transmission Operation If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information If the vehicle is has an automatic transmission it has an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster This display comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON RUN position There are several different positions for the shift lever Hydra Matic 4 Speed Automatic Transmission 2 29 PRNDM _1 Hevay Duty 6 Speed Automatic Transmission Shown Light Duty Similar See Range Selection Mode later in this section P Park This position locks the rear wheels It is the best position to use when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily When parked on a hill especially when the vehic
190. and Liftglass Without Remote Start Similar With Remote Start and Liftglass Without Remote Start Similar The following functions may be available if your vehicle has the RKE system Q Remote Vehicle Start For vehicles with this feature press to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 7 for additional information Lock Press to lock all the doors If enabled through the Driver Information Center DIC the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred If enabled through the DIC the horn chirps when the lock button is pressed again within three seconds See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 for additional information Pressing arms the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 21 a Unlock Press once to unlock only the driver door If is pressed again within three seconds all remaining doors unlock The interior lamps may come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on If enabled through the DIC the turn signal lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 If enabled through the DIC the exterior lights turn on briefly if it is dark enough outside See APPROACH LIGHTING under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 Pressing A on the RKE transmitter disarms th
191. arview Mirror sees Theft Deterrent Systems wee 2 20 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror a eres 2 48 Content Theft Deterrent sues 2 21 Outside Manual Mirrors 2 49 PASS Key lll Electronic Immobilizer 2 22 Outside Towing Mirrors e 2 49 oos lll Electronic Immobilizer Outside Power Mirrors eee 2 50 perat E 2 23 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 2 50 2 1 Section 2 Features and Controls Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 2 51 Park Tilt MIEFOES aiite terree bo sator tart ne 2 51 Outside Convex Mirror cscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 52 Outside Heated Mirrors sseessessesse 2 52 Object Detection Systems sssss 2 53 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 2 53 Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA 2 55 Rear Vision Camera RVC sssssse 2 59 OnStar System cece ccc ccc cease eneeeeeeeeeeees 2 64 Universal Home Remote System 2 67 Universal Home Remote System Operation With Three Round LED 2 68 Storage Areas ssssssssse 2 74 Glove BOX ei scies aset sett qet eade su E a 2 74 C plioldets te net tue oen ie iras stds 2 74 Center Console Storage sssssesess 2 74 Luggage Carrier eicere eere eu 2 75 Rear Storage Area sss 2
192. as an illuminated entry feature When the doors are opened the dome lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the extended position If the dome override button is pressed in the lamps will not come on Exit Lighting The interior lamps come on when the key is removed from the ignition They turn off automatically in 20 seconds The lights do not come on if the dome override button is pressed in 3 19 Reading Lamps For vehicles with reading lamps they are located on the overhead console To turn on the reading lamps press the button located next to each lamp To turn them off press the button again The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations To turn the lamps on or off press the button located next to the lamp The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery When the battery s state of charge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center DIC you may see the voltage move up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be displayed 3 20 The
193. at recall feature See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 1 8 for more information Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default No remote memory seat recall will occur ON The driver s seat and on some vehicles the outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed On some vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature the pedals will also automatically move See Relearn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 52 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 57 for more information on matching transmitters to driver ID numbers NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to turn the remote start off or on The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 7 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE START app
194. ation of the power liftgate The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound when the power liftgate is moving A CAUTION You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing Notice f you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass Always check to make sure the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in the following ways Press and hold the power liftgate button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter until the liftgate starts moving Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information Pressing the liftgate button on the overhead console Pressing the touchpad switch on the outside liftgate handle Pressing the buttons or touchpad switch a second time while the liftgate is moving reverses the direction C The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch Press the button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse that operation The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under extreme temperatures or under low battery conditions If this occurs the liftgate can still be operated manually If you shift the transmission out of PARK P while th
195. ave trouble starting on E85 it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly formulated for your climate If this happens switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve starting For good starting and heater efficiency below 32 F 0 C the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more than 70 ethanol It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible do not add less than three gallons 11 L when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least seven miles 11 km to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline so you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline See Filling the Tank on page 5 9 Notice Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle s fuel system Do not add anything to E85 Damage caused by additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fu
196. ayed This is a normal condition HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES PENDING is displayed on the DIC when the washer system is heating the fluid WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed when the washer fluid is low See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 Rear Window Wiper Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision The rear wiper control is located on the turn signal multifunction lever To turn the rear wiper on slide the lever to a wiper position O Off Turns the wiper off amp Rear Wiper Delay Turns on the rear wiper delay Rear Wiper Turns on the rear wiper Gi QJ Rear Wiper Wash To turn on the rear wiper wash push the button on the end of the turn signal multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the rear window The wipers will clear the rear window and either stop or return to your preset speed For more washer cycles press and hold the button The rear window wiper washer will not operate if the liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar If the liftgate or liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on the wiper will return to the parked position and stop Cruise Control A CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise
197. ays may come on when a vehicle you have passed remains in or drops back into the detection zone SBZA can be disabled through the Driver Information Center DIC See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 51 for more information If the SBZA is disabled by the driver the SBZA mirror displays will not light up during normal driving When the System Does Not Seem To Work Properly Occasional missed alerts can occur under normal circumstances and will increase in wet conditions The system does not need to be serviced due to an occasional missed alert The number of missed alerts will increase with increased rainfall or road spray If the SBZA displays do not light up when the system is on and vehicles are in the blind zone the system may need service Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer SBZA is designed to ignore stationary objects however the system may occasionally light up due to guard rails signs trees shrubs and other stationary objects This is normal system operation the vehicle does not need service 2 57 SBZA does not operate when the left or right corners of the rear bumper are covered with mud dirt snow ice slush or in heavy rainstorms For cleaning instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 110 If the DIC still displays the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS UNAVAILABLE message after cleaning the bumper see your dealer retailer The SBZA displays may remain on if a trailer is attached to the veh
198. battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the generator alternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on such as headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electrical needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC message might be displayed such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW or LOW BATTERY If this message is displayed it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome and reading lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is off This will keep the battery f
199. battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This can take several days of routine driving If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness your dealer retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Gage Canada United States The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range When the oil pressure reaches the low pressure zone the OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE message appears in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 and Engine Oil on page 5 15 for more information A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure Check the oil as soon as possible ZN CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The engine can become so hot that it catches fire Someone could be burned Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs wou
200. biter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in approximately 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 or call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French or write to Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Online Owner Center Online Owner Center U S www gmownercenter com gmc Information and services customized for your specific vehicle all in one convenient place Digital owner manual warranty information and more Online service and maintenance records Find GMC dealers for service nationwide Exclusive privileges and offers Recall notices for your specific vehicle OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links GMC www gmc com GMC Merchandise www gmccollection com Help
201. ce Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road creating less traction or grip Wet ice can occur at about 32 F 0 C when freezing rain begins to fall resulting in even less traction Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand Drive with caution whatever the condition Accelerate gently so traction is not lost Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick so there is even less traction Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more The StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads but slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions When driving through deep snow turn off the traction control part of the StabiliTrak System to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds The Antilock Brake System ABS on page 4 5 improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice Turn off cruise control if e
202. city see Capacities and Specifications on page 5 122 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for the location of the engine oil fill cap 324 AAAA SAE 5W 30 AR Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND GM STANDARD GM6094M DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER GM6094M Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M e SAE 5W 30 SAE 5W 30 is best for the vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 American Petroleum Institute API starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Cold Temperature O
203. ck BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or a DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment 3 112 DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s earlier in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 125 for more information If a MP3 WMA is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only through the remote control XM Radio Messages XL Explicit Language Channels These channels or any others can be blocked at a customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696
204. ckwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either SEEK arrow PP FWD or REV button until the desired levels are obtained To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the middle position press the 44 knob for more than two seconds 3 90 If the Rear Seat Audio RSA is turned on the radio disables FADE and the rear speakers mute Finding a Category CAT Station CAT Category The CAT button is used to find XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode To find XM channels within a desired category 1 Press the BAND button until the XM frequency displays Press the CAT button to display the category labels Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the category list by pressing the lt lt REV button or the DD FWD button 2 Press either of the two buttons below the desired category label to immediately tune to the first XM station associated with that category 3 Turn the J knob press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed or press either SEEK arrow to go to the previous or to the next XM station within the selected category 4 To exit the category search
205. cle Break In seueusussss 2 24 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Ignition POSITIONS isset err obtenta eene 2 25 Operation TH 2 5 Retained Accessory Power RAP 2 26 Remote Vehicle Start cceseeeneeeeeeeeeeenes 2 7 Starting the Engine sseeseeeeeses 2 26 Doors and Lock amp ener tene rtt 2 10 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 27 Door LOCKS iiec cei tese ensi etse tese fected 2 10 Engine Coolant Heater sssseeee 2 28 Power Door Locks insira hasie 2 10 Active Fuel Management csssesseneeee 2 29 Delayed Locking eene 2 10 Automatic Transmission Operation 2 29 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Tow Haul Mode E 2 35 Rear Door Security Locks eese 2 11 Four Wheel Drive sse 2 37 Lockout Protection sssseeeeee 2 12 Parking Brake sssse et teeetee 2 42 Liftgate Liftglass MM 2 12 Shifting Into Park sssss een 2 44 Power Liftgate cccccccseseessseseeeeeeeeeneeaees 2 14 Shifting Out of Park sssr 2 45 Power Assist Steps ssssesse 2 17 Parking Over Things That Burn 2 46 Windows 2 18 Engine Exhaust eee nmn 2 46 Power Windows 2 c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 19 Running the vehicle While Parked specimens EMT S n VISOES s ix retis cease ERE eea eaa aO Mesas 2 20 S icu cor veo MN DK s anual Re
206. cle does not have DIC buttons press the trip odometer reset stem until CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays 2 Find the vehicle s current location and variance zone number on the map Zones 1 through 15 are available 3 Press the set reset button to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone 3 62 4 Press the trip fuel button until the vehicle heading for example N for North is displayed in the DIC Or if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for two seconds to select the next available variance zone Repeat this step until the appropriate variance zone is displayed 5 If calibration is necessary calibrate the compass See Compass Calibration Procedure following Compass Calibration The compass can be manually calibrated Only calibrate the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location such as an open parking lot where driving the vehicle in circles is not a danger It is suggested to calibrate away from tall buildings utility wires manhole covers or other industrial structures if possible If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display the compass should be calibrated If the DIC display does not show a heading for example N for North or the heading does not change after making turns there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic CB or cell p
207. complete 8 Press and release the same button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete To program another Fixed Code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home automation device repeat Steps 1 8 choosing a different button in Step 6 than what was used for the garage door opener Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Reprogramming Universal Home Remote Buttons Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by repeating the instructions Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons The programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the Universal Home Remote device 1 Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights located directly above the buttons begin to blink rapidly 2 Once the indicator lights begin to blink release both buttons The codes from all buttons will be erased For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 6 2 73 Storage Areas Glove Box Lift up on the glove box lever to open it Cupholders For vehicles with cupholders located in the front a
208. complete support This is because an infant s neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing child restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants should always be secured in rear facing child restraints Child Restraint Systems A CAUTION A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash A rear facing infant seat A provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints The harness system holds the infant in place and ina crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint A forward facing child seat B provides restraint for the child s body with the harness 1 61 A booster seat C D is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window 1 62 Securing an Add On Ch
209. control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads With cruise control a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h When the brakes are applied cruise control is turned off If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and the system begins to limit wheel spin cruise control will automatically disengage See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 When road conditions allow the cruise control to be safely used again it can be turned back on B The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the steering wheel On Off This button can both activate and turn off the system The indicator light on the button turns on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off RES Resume Accelerate Press to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed SET Set Coast Press to set the speed or make the vehicle decelerate ed Cancel Press to cancel cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster comes on after the cru
210. cooling fan By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark 5 34 5 Replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated 6 Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the coolant is cold If necessary repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 1 through 6 Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured Engine Overheating The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating There is a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 43 In addition ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and a ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message comes on in the Driver Information Center DIC on the instrument panel See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears but instead get service help right away See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 If you do decide to lift the hood make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they are not do not continue to run the engine and have
211. crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Notice f extra inhibitors and or additives are used in the vehicle s cooling system the vehicle could be damaged Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13for more information Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for more information on location The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark If it is not you may have a leak in the cooling system 5 31 How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank ZN CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot A CAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan eng
212. cturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 122for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications 5 97 Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch 1 Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is visible If the cable is not visible proceed to Step 6 Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle For the secondary latch to work the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing down See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 102 A CAUTION Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt Read and follow the instructions listed next 5 98 If itis visible first try to tighten the cable by turning 6 Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends with the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks the backs facing each other or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable Loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns Repeat this procedure at least two times If the spare tire lowers to the ground continue with Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 87 If the spare does not lower turn the w
213. curve is banked and vehicle speed While in a curve speed is the one factor that can be controlled If there is a need to reduce speed do it before entering the curve while the front wheels are straight Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you These problems can be avoided by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply the brakes See Braking on page 4 4 It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions it can be turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten
214. d mud ice or snow and you want to rock the vehicle to attempt to free it It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off road conditions where high wheel spin is required See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 31 Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak system Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels engine speed management and by applying brakes to each individual wheel brake traction control as necessary The traction control system is enabled automatically when the vehicle is started It will activate and the StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving If traction control is turned off only the brake traction control portion of traction control will work The engine speed management will be disabled In this mode engine power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely This can cause the brake traction control to activate constantly Notice f the wheel s of one axle is allowed to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak ABS and brake warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are displayed the transfer case could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel s excessively while these lights and messages are
215. d Filter A3086C High Capacity Filter A3085C Oil Filter PF48 Spark Plugs 41 985 Wiper Blades Front 21 6 in 55 0 cm Rear 11 8 in 30 0 cm 15908915 A3085C high capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted Engine Drive Belt Routing If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 6 2 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or z Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or z Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 7 2 Online Owner Center sssssssseese 7 5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone CU TY USOS oro ere 7 6 Customer Assistance Offices 7 6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program
216. d cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your truck can carry Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going ZN CAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to There is also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving under Off Hoad Driving on page 4 12 4 39 Adding a
217. d diagnostic module and airbag wiring 1 97 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then check that the safety belt reminder light safety belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are all working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job See your dealer retailer to have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 36 for more information Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 5 109 1 98 Airbags The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement Make sure the airbag readiness light is working See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 37 for more information Notice f an airbag covering is damaged opened or broken the airbag may not work properly Do not open or break the airbag coverings If there are any opened or broken airbag covers have the airbag covering and or airbag module replaced For the location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 88 See your dealer retailer for service Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A CAUTION A crash can damage the restraint systems
218. d headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system if the vehicle has this feature The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Headphones earlier in this section for more information The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the RSA system if the vehicle has this feature The DVD player can be selected as an audio source on the RSA system See Hear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 134 for more information When a device is connected to the A V jacks or the radio s auxiliary input jack if the vehicle has this feature the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired headphones The front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this device through the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio Video Screen s The video screen s are located in the overhead console To use the video screen s 1 Push the release button located on the overhead console 2 Move the screen to the desired position When the video screen is not in use push it up into its locked position If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position the screen remains on this is normal and the DVD continues to play through the previous audio source Use the remote control power button or eject the disc to turn off the screen The overhead console conta
219. d move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 6 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 1 29 Removing the Third Row Seat To remove the seat do the following 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat 2 Fold the seatback forward using the instructions listed under Folding the Seatbacks previously The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback is folded 3 Unlatch the seat from the floor by pulling the carrying handle located at the rear of the seat rearward 4 Roll the seat out of the vehicle There is a track in the floor to guide the seat wheels out of the vehicle 1 30 Installing the Third Row Seat To install the seat do the following 1 Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle 2 Slide the front outboard seat wheels into the track on the floor and roll the seat forward The front latches should lock into place If the latches do not lock try tilting the rear of the seat upward slightly 3 Lower the rear of the seat and push down on the seat to engage the rear floor latches A CAUTION A seat that is not locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop People in the vehicle could be injured Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it 4 Push and pull on the seat to mak
220. d on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 5 69 Inflation Tire Pressure If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Premature or irregular wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following Unusual wear Poor handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards 5 70 A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle This label shows your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding
221. d under the root folder The next and previous folder function does not function on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then goes to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R or CD RW are played in the following order Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless folder mode has been chosen as the default display The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that is displayed is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension Such as mp3 a
222. de see Engine Exhaust on page 2 46 4 68 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself Before starting check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connectors lamps tires and mirror adjustments If the trailer has electric brakes start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This checks the electrical connection at the same time During the trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer Because the rig is longer it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right A
223. de of the Vehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 5 114 If the vehicle has the 5 3L V8 engine VIN Code 0 the 5 3L V8 engine VIN Code 3 or the 6 2L V8 engine VIN Code 2 you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 5 7 In all other engines use only unleaded gasoline See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 Gasoline Octane For all vehicles except those with the 6 2L V8 engine VIN Code 2 use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as po
224. de of the road and turn the ignition off Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on This message clears if the trailer is reconnected This message also clears if you acknowledge it If this message still displays either your vehicle or the trailer needs service See your dealer retailer See Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for more information DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC ENGINE HOT A C Air Conditioning TURNED OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 43 To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the air conditioning compressor turns back on You can continue to drive your vehicle If this message continues to appear have the system repaired by your dealer retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE ENGINE This message displays when the engine oil becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools dow
225. dealer retailer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment Do not use equipment exceeding the maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only 3 21 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter The front ashtray is located near the center of the instrument panel or on the front console if equipped Pull on the ashtray door to open it Notice f papers pins or other flammable items are put in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up To use the cigarette lighter push it in all the way and let go When it is ready it will pop back out by itself Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating does not let the lighter back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating can occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating 3 22 Climate Controls Climate Control System The heating cooling and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this
226. derbody Maintenance sess 5 113 Cleaning cont Washing Your Vehicle sssssssse 5 110 Weaihersinips 5 eoo preter e aeons 5 109 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 111 Climate Control System sesssesesssess 3 22 Outlet Adjustment eese 3 31 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System 3 31 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System Tee 3 33 Climate Control Systems Dual AutomiatiG 2 I ee tret ieee 3 25 Clock Setting na oaa ei 3 84 Collision Damage Repair esssesss 7 11 NEC RAI 3 61 Content Theft Deterrent sseseseseeesse 2 21 Control of a Vehicle ssesesseesesss 4 3 Coolant aug 5 29 Engine Temperature Gage s 3 43 Cooled Seals idee petente tnb paene E 1 8 Cooling System rye Eee ina 5 28 Courtesy Transportation Program 7 10 Cruise Control sse 3 12 Cruise Control Light senenin ai 3 49 C phold6rs 1 ttp ttm n keith eni 2 74 Customer Assistance sss 7 6 OMIGES M M 7 6 Text Telephone TTY Users 7 6 Customer Information Service Publications Ordering Information 7 15 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 7 2 Damage Repair Collision ssss 7 11 Data Recorders ape
227. dio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates 32 kbps 40 kbps 56 kbps 64 kbps 80 kbps 96 kbps 112 kbps 128 kbps 160 kbps 192 kbps 224 kbps 256 kbps and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate Song title artist name and album are available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 Compressed Audio The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 files By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left side of the screen but plays both file formats in the order in which they were recorded to the disc MP3 Format Burning an MP3 disc on a personal computer Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc Make sure the CD does not have more than a maximum of 50 folders 15 playlists and 512 folders and files to read and play Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can support up to eight subfolders deep however keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure playlists have a m3u extension as other file extensions mig
228. djustment en 3 31 Windshield Wipers Ann 3 9 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System MN 3 31 Rainsense ll Wipets oi t tere rette etra 3 9 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System eee ae A a tate A and Electronic Climate Controls 3 33 Ps Dips iponasher 3 49 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 34 Exterior Lamps LLL LLL D 315 Instrument Panel Cluster esses 3 35 Headlamps on Reminder ssuussssse 3 16 Bw SLM and Odometer ssseses e Daytime Running Lamps DRL MERE SAE 3 16 T ee Ol ilnceiei xe te e ees enc e eeRNUR Ga REP E Pale PER Automatic Headlamp System 3 17 Safety Belt Reminders See eee ieee SAE Auxiiary Roof Mounted Lamp vc ate Altbag Readiness Light suiii a Instrument Panel Brightness 3 19 enu Rules Ln ndicator sees 3 39 deg e MM CENE c 1 OREPDNCUM UEDNOS 3 40 Entry Lighting centenos 3 19 Brake System Warning Light RU MER 3 40 Exit Lighting cccccccssssesesesessssesesesevsvsveveesenes 3 19 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light 3 42 Reading Lamps 3 20 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 3 42 Dudes MC EL LN Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 3 43 Section 3 Tire Pressure bight 5 cione ntes 3 43 Malfunction Indicator Lamp sss 3 44 Oil Pressure Gage esee 3 47 Oil Pressu
229. driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and infants If a child will be riding in the vehicle see Older Children on page 1 54 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 57 Follow those rules for everyone s protection It is very important for all occupants to buckle up Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts First before you or your passenger s wear a safety belt there is important information you should know WO Ss Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force on
230. driver or passenger side of the front window Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window It can be moved along the rod from side to side in this position also Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the driver s and passenger s sun visors Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities This vehicle has theft deterrent features however they do not make it impossible to steal Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle may have a content theft deterrent alarm system This is the security light To arm the theft deterrent system 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the power door lock switch The security light will come on to inform the driver the system is arming If a door is open when the doors are locked the security light will flash If the delayed locking feature is turned on the theft deterrent system will not start the arming process until the last door is closed and the delay timer has expired See Delayed Locking on page 2 10 3 Close all doors The security light should go off after about 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the security light goes off If a locked door is opened without using the RKE transmitter a ten second pre alarm will occur The horn will chirp and the lights w
231. ds work together to explain vehicle operation If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference Litho in U S A Part No 15911384 B Second Printing Canadian Owners Canadian Owners Propri taires Canadiens A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer retailer or from On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais aupr s du concessionnaire ou l adresse suivante Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 Num ro de poste 6438 de langue fran aise www helminc com Index To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found 92008 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not Do not do this or Do not let this happen A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning ZN CAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid or reduce the hazard Read these cautions A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Notice These mean t
232. e Rolling Code For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 866 572 2728 or go to learcar2u com Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before starting Otherwise the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated To program up to three devices Samp pinnae orc on 1 From inside the vehicle press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds and immediately release them 2 Locate in the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button It can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit and may be a colored button Press this button After pressing this button complete the following steps in less than 30 seconds 3 Immediately return to the vehicle Press and hold the Universal Home Remote button that will be used to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink This button may need to be held for up to 20 seconds 2 69 4 Immediately within one second release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete 5 Press and release the same button again The garage door should move conf
233. e plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise The plastic nut caps will be retained in the hub cap after it is removed from the wheel 5 91 Jacking Locations Overall View 3 Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen A Front Position the wheel nuts Do not remove the wheel nuts yet B Rear Position 4 Position the jack under the vehicle as shown 5 92 Front Position 1500 Models Front Position 2500 Models Front Tire Flat If the flat tire is on a front tire of the vehicle you will need to use the jack handle and only one jack handle extension Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension Attach the jack handle to the jack A Position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame sections overlap Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground 5 93 5 94 Rear Position 1500 Models Rear Position All Other Models Rear Tire Flat If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle you will need to use the jack handle B and both jack handle extensions C Attach the wheel wrench D to the jack handle extensions C Attach the jack handle B to the jack A Use the jacking pad provided on the rear axle Turn the wheel wrench D cloc
234. e DVD is playing The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode Some radios may perform reverse slow play by pressing the play pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button To cancel slow play mode press the play pause button 4 Previous Track Chapter Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt Next Track Chapter Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Fast Reverse Press this button to fast reverse the DVD or CD To stop fast reversing a DVD video press the play button To stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD release this button This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding a DVD video press the play pause button To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD release this button This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews d Audio Press this button to change audio tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc Subtitles Pre
235. e Seat s to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position do the following 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked A CAUTION A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted 3 Make sure the safety belt in the center seating position is not caught between the two seats and is not twisted Folding and Tumbling the Seat s from the Third Row Seats ZN CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows if your vehicle has them do the following 2 Lift the lever s
236. e air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed Express Open Express Close To express open the sunroof fully press and release the rear of the driver s side switch The sunroof will open automatically To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time To express close the sunroof fully press and release the front of the driver s side switch The sunroof will close automatically To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof but can also be opened manually The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to the full open position From the comfort stop position press the rear of the driver s side switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full open position When the sunroof is opened an air deflector will automatically raise The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed 2 78 Vent The sunroof has an express vent open feature From the closed position press the rear of the passenger s side switch to vent the sunroof To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time To close the sunroof press and hold the front of the passenger s side switch To stop the sunroof partway release the switch Anti Pinch Feature If an object is in the path of the sunroof while it is closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the
237. e and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down 1 86 Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object e f the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object does not deform e f the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall f the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags Dual stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts dual stage airbags inflate at a level less than fu
238. e content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 21 cC Liftglass For vehicles with a liftglass press and hold to unlock the liftglass C Power Liftgate For vehicles with a power liftgate press and hold to open and close the liftgate The taillamps flash and a chime sounds to indicate when the liftgate is opening and closing 2 Vehicle Locator Panic Alarm Press and release to locate the vehicle The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds three times Press and hold 2 for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to ON RUN or 2X is pressed again The ignition must be in LOCK OFF for the panic alarm to work 2 6 Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will work If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer retailer When the replacement transmitter is programmed to this vehicle all remaining transmitters must also be reprogrammed Any lost or stolen transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed The vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters programmed to it See Relearn Remote Key under D C Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 52 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 57 for instructi
239. e displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 5 15 for more information This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check the oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer See Engine Oil on page 5 15 PARK ASSIST OFF If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system after the vehicle has been started this message displays to remind the driver that the URPA system has been turned off Press the set reset button or the trip odometer reset stem to acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display To turn the URPA system back on see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 53 3 67 PASSENGER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the front passe
240. e electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can cause stalling after start up stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up If one or more of these conditions occurs change the fuel brand used It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 If none of the above have made the light turn off your dealer retailer can check the vehicle 3 46 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running or if the key is in ON RUN and the light is not on The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if the
241. e exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage CAUTION Continued Running the Vehicle While Parked CAUTION Continued It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know ZN CAUTION Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon The vehicle s exhaust system has been modified damaged or improperly repaired There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after market modifications that are not completely sealed If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle Drive it only with the windows completely down Have the vehicle repaired immediately Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 2 46 Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation 2 47 A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the veh
242. e inside rearview mirror until the left indicator light turns off The rear camera vision display is now disabled To turn the rear vision camera system on again press and hold until the left indicator light illuminates The rear vision camera system display is now enabled and the display will appear in the mirror normally 2 59 Vehicles With Navigation System The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle When the driver shifts the vehicle into R Reverse the video image automatically appears on the navigation screen Once the driver shifts out of R Reverse the navigation screen will go back to the last screen that had been displayed after a delay Turning the Rear Vision Camera System On or Off To turn the rear vision camera system on or off 1 Shift into P Park 2 Press the MENU button to enter the configure menu options then press the MENU hard key to select Display or touch the Display screen button 3 Select the Rear Camera Options screen button The Rear Camera Options screen will display 2 60 4 Select the Video screen button When the Video screen button is highlighted the RVC system is on The delay that is received after shifting out of R Reverse is approximately 10 seconds The delay can be cancelled by performing one of the following Pressing a hard key on the navigation system Shifting in to P Park
243. e number properly it responds Dial Number Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues 3 123 Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Send name tag The system responds with Say a name tag to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag to send f the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK Sending name tag and the dial tones are sent and the call continues f the system is not sure it recognized the name tag properly it responds Dial name tag Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending name tag and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Clearing the System Unless information is deleted out of the in vehicle Bluetooth system it will be retained indefinitely This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and phone pairing information For information on how to delete this information see the above sections on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags 3 124 Other Information The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those
244. e of the seat 2 Move the seatback to the desired position then release the lever to lock the seatback in place 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked To return the seatback to an upright position do the following 1 Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 2 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 1 21 Manual Fold and Tumble Feature Folding and Tumbling the Seat s To fold and tumble the seat do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat The seatback will fold forward Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat load floor If the seatback cannot fold flat try moving the front seat forward and or put the front seatback in the upright position 2 Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat to release the seatback 1 22 3 Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat f
245. e power function is in progress the liftgate power function will continue to completion If you shift the transmission out of PARK P and accelerate before the power liftgate latches closed the liftgate may reverse to the open position Cargo could fall out of the vehicle Always make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched before you drive away If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support struts have lost pressure the lights will flash and a chime will sound The liftgate will stay open temporarily then slowly close See your dealer retailer for service before using the liftgate Obstacle Detection Features If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full closed or open position After removing the obstruction the power liftgate operation can be used again If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power cycle the power function will deactivate and you must manually open or close the liftgate The REAR ACCESS OPEN warning message in the Driver Information Center DIC will indicate that the liftgate is open After removing the obstructions manually open the liftgate to the full open position or close the liftgate to the fully closed and latched position The liftgate will now resume normal power operation Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the side edges of the liftgate
246. e something happens to one of them For vehicles with a winch be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck but you will want to know how to use it properly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off roading requires some new and different skills Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds Use your arms hands feet and body to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control the vehicle is to control the speed At higher speeds You approach things faster and have less time to react There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles The vehicle has more bounce when driving over obstacles More braking distance is needed especially on an unpaved surface A CAUTION When you are driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you are driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain Be familiar wi
247. e sure it is locked into place The seatback cannot be raised to the upright position unless the seat is secured to A CAUTION the floor 5 Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly position attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always 7 Make sure the safety belts are returned to the push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they original position over the seatbacks are locked 6 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 1 31 Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly It also describes some things not to do with safety belts A CAUTION Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly In a crash if you or your passenger s are not wearing safety belts the injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle You and your passenger s can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you
248. e third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats if your vehicle has them do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 1 20 2 Press the automatic seat release button located on the panel behind the rear doors Driver s Side Rear Panel Button shown One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat Bucket Seats Second Row If your vehicle has bucket seats the seatbacks can be reclined the seats can be folded for additional cargo space or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seats if your vehicle has them These seats will have either the manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic seat release fold and tumble feature Reclining Seatbacks To recline the seatback do the following 1 Lift the lever located on the outboard sid
249. e time it takes for the vehicle to cool down It also helps the system to operate more efficiently The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so a small amount of water might drip under the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal lt amp Recirculation Press to turn the recirculation mode on or off An indicator light comes on to show that the recirculation is on This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle It can be used to help prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor defog or defrost modes If recirculation is selected with one of those modes the indicator light flashes three times and then turns off The air conditioning compressor also comes on when this mode is activated While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed The recirculation mode can also be turned off by turning off the ignition REAR For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls Press to turn the rear climate control system on or off See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls on page 3 33 Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window 3 Rear Window Defogger Press to turn the r
250. e unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 90 for additional information A CAUTION A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle Wherever a child restraint is installed be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it 1 65 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in acrash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehic
251. ear window defogger on or off It automatically turns off several minutes after it has been activated The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Heated Mirrors For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors the mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2 50 3 29 Sensors The solar sensor located in the defrost grille in the middle of the instrument panel monitors the solar heat Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly 3 30 The interior temperature sensors located in the headliner above the driver side seat and if equipped in the headliner above the second row seats measure the temperature of the air inside the vehicle There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain
252. ears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The remote start feature will be disabled ON default The remote start feature will be enabled NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 81 FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings RESTORE ALL default The customization features will be set to their factory default settings DO NOT RESTORE The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 82 EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display Press the set reset button once to exit the menu If you do not exit pressing the customization button again will return you to the beginning
253. eatback The seatback will fold forward 3 Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor The seat will tumble forward Power Release Fold and Tumble Feature The transmission must be in P Park for this feature to work Folding and Tumbling the Seat s A CAUTION Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when someone is sitting in the seat could cause injury to the person sitting there Always make sure there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing the automatic seat release button To fold and tumble the seat do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 From the front seats press one of the automatic seat release buttons located on the overhead console Overhead Console Buttons shown When accessing the third row seats if your vehicle has them from the outside of the vehicle press the button on the panel behind either rear door One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat 1 25 Returning the Seat s to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting
254. eck procedure to check fluid level when the transmission temperature is between 80 F and 90 F 27 C and 32 C 1 Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for more information 2 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 3 Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 5 26 4 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading C pun RHO 5 If the fluid level is below the COLD check band add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level into the COLD band It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5L Do not overfill 6 Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after the transmission reaches a normal operating temperature between 160 F to 200 F 71 C to 93 C 7 f the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Hot Check Procedure Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level when the transmission fluid temperature is between 160 F and 200 F 71 C and 93 C The hot check is the most accurate method to check the fluid level The hot check should be performed at the first opportuni
255. eck that the headphones are on correctly using the L left and R right on the headphones lost the remote and or See your dealer retailer the headphones for assistance The DVD is playing but Check that the RSE video there is no picture or screen is sourced to the sound DVD player 3 133 DVD Display Error Messages The DVD display error message depends on which radio is in the vehicle The video screen can display one of the following Disc Load Eject Error Displays when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error Displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error Displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted Displays if no disc is present when EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on the radio DVD Distortion Video distortion can occur when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Position Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System 3 134 Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen as da
256. ect Press this button to eject a CD or DVD If a CD or DVD is ejected but not removed the player automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed because of an unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject DVD V Video Display Buttons Once a DVD V is inserted the radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback See the tag options listed after for more information The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD V menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 125 for more information The Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD V is inserted into the DVD slot gt il Play Pause Press either the play or pause icon displayed on the radio system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on display the system is in pause mode If the pause icon is showing on display the system is in playback mode If the DVD screen is off press the play button to turn the screen on Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have finished although there could be a delay of up to 30 seconds If the DVD does not begin playing the movie automatically press the pushbutton located u
257. ecured in the child restraint Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint 1 63 Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 1 64 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under som
258. ed adjusted and maintained properly Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak the trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle s hydraulic system Integrated Trailer Brake Control System The vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system for electric trailer brakes This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel on vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Brake Control System The power output to the trailer brakes is based on the amount of brake pressure being applied by the vehicle s brake system This available power output to the trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide range of trailering situations The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle s brake anti lock brake and StabiliTrak if equipped systems In trailering conditions that cause the vehicle s anti lock brake or StabiliTrak systems to activate power sent to the trailers brakes will be automatically adjusted to minimize trailer wheel lock up This does not imply that the trailer has the StabiliTrak system If the vehicle s brake anti lock brake or StabiliTrak systems are not functioning properly the ITBC system may not be fully functional or may not function at all Make sure all of these systems are fully operational to ensure full functionality of the ITBC system 4 61 The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle s electrical system Turning the ignition off will also turn off the ITBC system The ITBC
259. ee the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information 3 50 Low Fuel Warning Light This light under the fuel gage comes on briefly while the engine is being started This light and a chime comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel The Driver Information Center also displays a FUEL LEVEL LOW message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 for more information When fuel is added this light and message should go off If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer Driver Information Center DIC Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC The DIC displays information about your vehicle It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected All messages will appear in the DIC display located below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off If your vehicle has DIC buttons see DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons later in this section and DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 for the displays available If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons see DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons later in this section for the displays available 3 51 DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons If your vehicle has DIC buttons the information below explains the op
260. eel drive Change transfer case fluid severe service See footnotes g and n Four wheel drive Change transfer case fluid normal service See footnote g Additional Required Services cont d EDES 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 80000 120 000 160 000 200 000 240 000 Inspect evaporative control system An Emission Control Service See footnotes T and k Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control C Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote i Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote m Maintenance Footnotes T The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the front suspension steering linkage and parking brake cable guides Control arm ball joints on 2500 series vehicles require lubrication but should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10 F 12 C or higher or they could be damaged Control arm ball joints on
261. eight of the lumbar support press and hold the bottom of the control Release the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of lumbar support Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 1 8 for more information Keep in mind that as your seating position changes as it may during long trips so should the position of your lumbar support Adjust the seat as needed Heated Seats On vehicles with heated front seats the controls are located on the driver and passenger doors Heated Seatback Press to turn on the heated seatback it Heated Seat and Seatback Press to turn on the heated seat and seatback The light on the button will come on to indicate that the feature is working Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heat to the seat off Indicator lights will show the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated seats will be canceled 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off To use the heated seat feature after restarting the vehicle press the heated seat or seatback button again Heated and Cooled Seats If the front seats have the heated and cooled seat feature the buttons used to control this feature are located on the front doors near the door handle 8j Cooled Seat To cool the entire seat pre
262. el might be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling the Tank A CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off the engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling the vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter the vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability the fuel cap will be yellow and state that E85 or gasoline can be used See Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 5 7 Doe To open the fuel door push the rearward center edge in and release and it will open To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if the cap is released too soon it will spring
263. elease it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass This feature lets you use the high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam the high beam headlamps will turn on They will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you The high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation Windshield Wipers Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the windshield wipers S Mist Turn to mist for a single wiping cycle Hold it there until the wipers start Then let go The wipers stop after one wipe Hold the band on mist longer for more wipe cycles Q Off Turns the wipers off 1 Delay Turn the band to adjust the delay time The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as the band is moved to the top of the lever This can be very useful in light rain or snow GEB Low Speed For steady wiping at low speed GB High Speed For high speed wiping Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they are frozen to the windshield gently loosen or thaw them Damaged wiper blades may not clear the windshield well making it harder to see and dr
264. elected a number displays next to the M indicating the current gear This number is the highest gear that can be used However the vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions This means that all gears below that number are available When 5 Fifth is selected 1 First through 5 Fifth gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle but 6 Sixth cannot be used until the plus minus button located on the steering column lever is used to change to the gear Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection Mode is active See Tow Haul Mode on page 2 35 2 34 While using Range Selection Mode cruise control and the Tow Haul mode can be used Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place Low Traction Mode If the vehicle has the Hydra Matic 6 Speed Automatic Transmission it has a Low Traction Mode that assists in vehicle acceleration when road conditions are slippery such as with ice or snow While the vehicle is at a stop select the second gear range using Range Selection Mode This will limit torque to the wheels after it detects wheel slip preventing the tires from spinning Tow Haul Mode When Tow Haul mode is selected the T
265. ely Notice f you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer retailer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 44 Filling a Portable Fuel Container A CAUTION Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others e Dispense fuel only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Do not smoke while pumping fuel Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel Checking Things Under the Hood A CAUTION A CAUTION An electric fan under the hood can start up and Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine injure you even when the
266. em ssssss 5 18 Engine Air Cleaner Filter sssss 5 19 Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission ssssss 5 21 Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 Speed Transmission sseusss 5 24 Cooling System sss 5 28 Engine Coolant cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 29 Engine Overheating esses 5 34 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode cceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeees 5 37 Engine Fan Noise eeeeeeeeseeses 5 37 Power Steering Fluid c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 38 Windshield Washer Fluid esseessssse 5 39 Brakes istoc Sibi ap Ente Rica Pup 5 40 Battery sacaditeanonttnn mute dctiannond van OA AERAN 5 43 Jurmp Startirig u iecore eoe 5 44 Rear Axle teo ieteeutee steer e bep 5 49 Four Wheel Drive sseseeeenene 5 51 Front AXIG co er rera tentis ene 5 52 Headlamp Aiming c 5 53 Bulb Replacement cceeeeeeeeeeeee eee tees 5 56 Halogen Bulbs eene tri reet 5 56 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back Up Lamps ssd tiet rtt rte tx tnn 5 57 License Plate Lamp seeessse 5 58 Replacement Bulbs sseeeeess 5 58 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 59 DI c 5 61 Tire Sidewall Labeling
267. em determines an infant is present in a child restraint A right front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 38 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on may inflate the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat 1 92 When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children including children in child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing System may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag
268. emperature Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature The rear control temperature display will show the temperature setting increasing or decreasing The display only indicates climate control functions when the system is in rear independent mode Manual Operation Fan Control Press these buttons on the rear seat audio control panel to increase or decrease the airflow Pressing the fan up button when the system is off will turn the system on The air delivery mode will remain under automatic control Temperature Control Press these buttons to adjust the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area Press the button for warmer air and press the button for cooler air 4 Air Delivery Mode Control Press the mode button to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display Multiple presses will cycle through the delivery selections 3 34 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working Gages can indicate whe
269. en accessing the third row seats if your vehicle has them from the outside of the vehicle press the button on the panel behind either rear door One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat Returning the Seat s to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position do the following A CAUTION 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted 3 Make sure that the safety belt in the center seating position is not caught between the two seats and is not twisted Folding and Tumbling the Second Row Seat s from the Third Row Seats or Outside A CAUTION Using th
270. ensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag s See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 90 If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 If your vehicle has rollover roof rail airbags see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5 80 for additional important information Q A A What if added a snow plow Will it keep the airbags from working properly We have designed our airbag systems to work properly under a wide range of conditions including snow plowing with vehicles that have the optional Snow Plow Prep Package RPO VYU But do not change or defeat the snow plow s tripping mechanism If you do it can damage your snow plow and your vehicle and it may cause an airbag inflation Because have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 In addition your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors sensing an
271. ent However if the vehicle is damaged in a crash the aim of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment may be necessary If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you this may mean the vertical aim of your headlamps n eeds to be adjusted 5 53 It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your dealer retailer for service if the headlamps need to be adjusted It is possible however to re aim the headlamps as described The vehicle should Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft 7 6 m from a light colored wall Have all four tires on a level surface which is level all the way to the wall Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall Not have any snow ice or mud on it Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being performed Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 160 Ibs 75 kg sitting on the driver seat Have the tires properly inflated Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the vehicle 5 54 Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle s low beam headlamps The high beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if the low beam headlamps are aimed properly To adjust the vertical aim 1 Open the hood See Hood Release on page 5 13 for more information 2 Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low beam headlamp 3 Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot on the low beam headlamp 4 At a wall measure from the ground u
272. equent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service i Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer retailer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 5 29 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap j A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed k Inspect system Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook up routing and condition Check that the purge valve works properly if equipped Replace as needed I If driving regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change m Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary n Severe Service Change transfer case fluid if the vehicle is mainly used for trailer towing or driven in city traffic wet environment or high ambient temperatures Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety dependability and emission control performance Your dealer retailer can assist with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the vehic
273. er Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 www GMC com 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 1 800 GMC 8583 462 8583 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 GMC 8782 462 8782 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 www gmcanada com 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program EJMOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair scooter lift The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call
274. er output to the trailer anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected Output is displayed in 0 to 10 bars Dashes may appear in the OUTPUT display See Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for more information Compass Zone Setting This display allows for setting the compass zone See DIC Compass on page 3 61 for more information Compass Recalibration This display allows for calibrating the compass See DIC Compass on page 3 61 for more information 3 59 Oil Life To access this display the vehicle must be in P Park Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 You should change the oil as soon as you can See Engine Oil on page 5 15 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself
275. er seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat 1 94 If this happens use the following steps to allow the System to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 3 Place the seatback in the fully upright position 4 Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with legs comfortably extended 5 Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status See Safety Belts and Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way the child restraint locking feature will be engaged This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing system to turn the airbag off for some adult size occupants If this happens let the belt go back all the way and start again A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or cushion or aftermarket equipment such as seat cov
276. er service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so 1 96 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module steering wheel instrument panel roof rail airbag modules ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim overhead console front sensors side impact sensors rollover sensor module or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system In addition your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger s position which includes sensors that are part of the passenger s seat The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non GM covers upholstery or trim or with GM covers upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle Any object such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device installed under or on top of the seat fabric could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag s or prevent the passenger s
277. eration of this system The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The DIC displays trip fuel and vehicle system information and warning messages if a system problem is detected The DIC also allows some features to be customized See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 for more information If your vehicle has DIC buttons you can also use the trip odometer reset stem to view some of the DIC displays See DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons later in this section 3 52 DIC Buttons The buttons are the trip fuel vehicle information customization and set reset buttons The button functions are detailed in the following pages 7 Trip Fuel Press this button to display the odometer trip odometer fuel range average economy fuel used timer and transmission temperature The compass and outside air temperature will also be shown in the display The temperature will be shown in F or C depending on the units selected Ti Vehicle Information Press this button to display the oil life units side blind zone system on off tire pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS trailer brake gain and output information for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system engine hours Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter programmi
278. ere is a DRP problem both the brake and ABS warning lights come on accompanied by a 10 second chime The lights and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on until the problem is repaired See your dealer retailer for service Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel as required faster than any driver could This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard As the brakes are applied the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even with ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work The brakes might vibrate or some noise might be heard but this is normal Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake
279. erheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle Climbs a long hill on a hot day Stops after high speed driving ldles for long periods in traffic Tows a trailer See Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 5 36 If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam 1 Turn the air conditioning off 2 Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed Open the windows as necessary 3 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in N Neutral while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to P Park or N Neutral and let the engine idle If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays the vehicle can be driven Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you If the warning does not come back on continue to drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park the vehicle right away If there is no sign of steam idle the engine for three minutes while parked If the warning is still displayed turn off the engine until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode later in this section Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the ENGINE POWER IS REDUC
280. erly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described previously in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide Slide the guide into its storage clip on the interior body or storage pocket on the side of the seat 1 51 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly 1 52 Lap Belt This part is only for the lap belt To learn how to wear a lap shoulder belt see Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 45 You vehicle may have a center seating position When you sit in the center
281. ers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 96 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates The on indicator may be lit if an object such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device is put on an unoccupied seat If this is not desired remove the object from the seat ZN CAUTION Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system 1 95 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle Your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 A CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow prop
282. ers a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode has been chosen as the default display The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 Insert a CD R or CD RW partway into the slot Single CD Player or press the load button and wait for the message to insert disc Six Disc CD Player label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R or CD RW should begin playing If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD R or CD RW in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD R or CD RW starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number and song title displays amp EJECT Press this button to ejec
283. ervices and system limitations see the OnStar Owner s Guide in the glove box or visit onstar com U S or onstar ca Canada contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or TTY 1 877 248 2080 or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week OnStar Services Available with the Safe amp Sound Plan Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Advanced Automatic Crash Notification AACN If equipped Link to Emergency Services Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics OnStar Hands Free Calling with 30 trial minutes OnStar Virtual Advisor U S Only OnStar Services Included with Directions amp Connections Plan All Safe and Sound Plan Services OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation If equipped or Driving Directions Advisor delivered RideAssist Information and Convenience Services OnStar Hands Free Calling OnStar Hands Free Calling allows eligible OnStar subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands Hands Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle and can be used with OnStar Pre Paid Minute Packages Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good for 60 days Hands Free Calling can also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U S or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada depending on eligibility To find out more refer to the
284. ery Mode Control REAR Press the REAR button on the front climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or off An indicator comes on when the rear system is on See Climate Control System on page 3 22 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 25 The rear system can also be turned off by turning the rear fan knob to the O position 3 31 Mimic Mode This mode matches the rear climate control to the front climate control airflow settings It comes on when REAR is pressed the first time Independent Mode This mode directs rear seating airflow according to the settings of the rear controls It comes on when any rear control is adjusted Temperature Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the airflow temperature into the passenger area Fan Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed Air Delivery Mode Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow 3 32 A Vent Air is directed through the headliner outlets De Bi Level Air is directed through the floor and headliner outlets The rear system floor outlets are located directly behind the second row seats The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings Ur Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets The rear system floor outlets are located directly behind the Seco
285. ery hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play The road is very rough When the road becomes smoother the CD should play The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again There could have been a problem while burning the CD The label could be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer retailer when reporting the problem Using the DVD Player The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the remote control or by the RSA system or by the buttons on the radio faceplate See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 125 and Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 134 for more information The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of most DVDs The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW DVD Video DVD Audio DVD R RW DVD R RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats If an error message displays on the video screen or the radio see DVD Display Error Messages under Hear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 125 and DVD Radio Error Messages in this section for more informatio
286. es on briefly when the ignition key is turned to START but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer The light should go out once the engine starts If it stays on or comes on while driving there could be a problem with the charging system A charging system message in the Driver Information Center DIC can also appear See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 for more information This light could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt or that there is an electrical problem Have it checked right away If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on turn off accessories such as the radio and air conditioner 3 39 Voltmeter Gage When the engine is not running but the ignition is on this gage shows the battery s state of charge in DC volts When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system The charging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery for improved fuel economy and battery life The gage may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading this is normal Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range The gage may also read low during the fuel economy mode this is normal 3 40 Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are ope
287. ess hole Be sure the hoist end J of the extension D connects to the hoist shaft B The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire Turn the wheel wrench E counterclockwise to lower the spare tire H to the ground Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle If the spare tire does not lower to the ground the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower See Secondary Latch System on page 5 98 for more information 5 89 6 Use the wheel wrench hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable towards you to assist in reaching the spare tire 7 Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in the cable to access the tire wheel retainer Separate the retainer from the guide pin by sliding the retainer up the pin while pressing down on the latch 5 90 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1 Do a safety check before proceeding See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 86 for more information Once the retainer is separated from the guide pin tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of the wheel along with the cable and latch 8 Put the spare tire near the flat tire 2 If your vehicle has a center cap that covers the wheel fasteners place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry the cap out If the wheel has a bolt on hub cap loosen th
288. etooth phone is not connected calls will be made using OnStar Hands Free Calling if available Refer to the OnStar owner s guide for more information Pairing Information Upto five cell phones can be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving The in vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links with the first available paired cell phone in the order the phone was paired Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the in vehicle Bluetooth system at a time Pairing should only need to be completed once unless changes to the pairing information have been made or the phone is deleted To link to a different paired phone see Linking to a Different Phone later in this section Pairing a Phone 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say Pair The system responds with instructions and a four digit PIN number The PIN number will be used in Step 4 Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will be paired to the vehicle Reference the cell phone manufacturers user guide for information on this process Locate the device named General Motors in the list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that was provided in Step 3 The system prom
289. event most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area We recommend that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We recommend against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on If this occurs return to your dealer retailer for service Fuel E85 85 Ethanol The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 5 114 If the vehicle has the 5 3L
290. extensions to the tool bag B 2 Assemble wheel blocks A and jack E together with the wing nut F Position the jack E and wheel blocks A in the driver s side trim panel over the wheelhouse Turn the jack knob G clockwise until the jack is secured tight in the mounting bracket Be sure to position the holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket Use the retaining bracket C to fasten the tool bag B on the stud and turn the wing nut D clockwise to secure 6 Return the storage tray to its original stored position 5 105 Spare Tire Your vehicle when new had a fully inflated spare tire A spare tire may lose air over time so check its inflation pressure regularly See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle For instruction on how to remove install or store a spare tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5 91 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 102 Notice f the vehicle has four wheel drive and the different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle do not drive in four wheel drive until you can have your flat tire repaired and or replaced You could damage the vehicle and the repair costs would not be covered by your warranty Never use four wheel drive when the different size spare tire is installed on
291. ey can affect vehicle performance and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non GM certified parts including control module modifications are not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle Your GM dealer retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer retailer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories Also see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 96 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain type
292. f dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help in the U S call the GMC Consumer Relations Manager at 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Customer Assistance prompt In Canada call General Motors of Canada Customer Communication at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting GMC remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest following Step One first STEP THREE U S Owners Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you can file with the Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the i
293. features DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary K pi Seek When listening to FM AM or XM if equipped press the left or right Pl seek arrow to go to the previous or to the next station or channel and stay there This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio Press and hold the left or right Pl seek arrow until the display flashes to tune to an individual station The display stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed for more than two seconds This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio While listening to a disc press the left seek arrow to go back to the start of the current track or chapter if more than ten seconds have played Press the right Dl seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter on the disc This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a DVD video menu is being displayed press the left or right Dl seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the menu Hold the left K1 or right Pl arrow to perform a cursor left or right on the menu 3 135 PROG Program Press this button to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing press this button to go to the be
294. fely 5 85 Changing a Flat Tire If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on the hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 A CAUTION Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly Put the shift lever in P Park If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised CAUTION Continued 5 86 CAUTION Continued 5 Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle 6 Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle When the vehicle has a flat tire B use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks A A Wheel Block B Flat Tire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment you will need to change a flat tire is stored under
295. fer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when e A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also to check the brake fluid See Scheduled Maintenance cause a low fluid level Have the brake hydraulic on page 6 4 System fixed since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well 5 40 Checking Brake Fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 The fluid level should be above MIN If it is not T tA WA have the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir A CAUTION With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic System the brakes might not work well This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid Notice Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid f b
296. first and second row seating positions are equipped with free falling latch plates If the vehicle has a third row the lap shoulder belts have either free falling or cinching latch plates Use the following pictures to determine the latch plate style Cinching Latch Plate 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how Free Falling Latch Plate 1 74 For third row seating positions with cinching latch 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks plates tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed Position the release button on the buckle co that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 75 4 For passenger seating positions with a lap shoulder belt and a free falling latch plate pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock When installing a child restraint using a lap shoulder belt and a cinching latch plate skip Step 4 and proceed to Step 5 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighte
297. first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you need to start over The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below 1 Set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON RUN with the engine off 3 Press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for approximately five seconds The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen 4 Start with the driver side front tire 5 Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chirp which may take up to 30 seconds to sound confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position 6 Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 7 Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 5 75 8 Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off 9 Turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF 10 Set all
298. flation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 73 for additional information 5 72 Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device
299. for the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear 5 Start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired position Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the different modes may cause the transfer case to enter the shift protection mode This will protect the transfer case from possible damage and will only allow the transfer case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to three minutes 2 44 Parking Brake For vehicles with a release handle set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down then pushing down the parking brake pedal If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 40 2 42 A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 5 mph 8 km h To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Then pull the bottom edge of the lever with the parking brake symbol located above the parking brake pedal If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released the brake system warning light goes off Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving If you
300. for Children LATCH on page 1 66 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 38 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 79 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of Position the release button on the buckle so that the retractor to set the lock the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 80 6 To tighten the belt push d
301. for conditions such as ice and dust Always wash the vehicle s chrome with soap and water after exposure Notice Using strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners 5 112 cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because they could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Notice Driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never drive a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner N
302. fore using the system The SBZA system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 310 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Frequency of operation 24 05GHz 24 25GHz Field Strength Not greater than 2 5V m peak 0 25V m average at a distance of 3m 2 55 The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment Such modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment ZN CAUTION SBZA is only a lane changing aid and does not replace driver vision SBZA does not detect Vehicles outside the side blind zones which may be rapidly approaching Pedestrians bicyclists or animals Failure to use proper care when changing lanes may result in damage to the vehicle injury or death Always check the outside and rearview mirrors glance over your shoulder and use the tu
303. four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label 11 Put the valve caps back on the valve stems Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle s tires including the spare tire for signs of wear or damage See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 77 for more information Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new 5 76 Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 77 and Wheel Replacement on page 5 82 When rotating your vehicle s tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 73 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under
304. ften Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding See Skidding under Loss of Control on page 4 11 The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine before making an upshift if the engine is able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed throttle position and vehicle load If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained the transmission does not upshift and instead holds the current gear In some cases this could appear to be a delayed shift however the transmission is operating normally The vehicle s transmission uses adaptive shift controls Adaptive shift controls continually compares key shift parameters to pre programmed ideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer The transmission constantly makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance according to how the vehicle is being used such as with a heavy load or when the temperature changes During this adaptive shift control process shifting might feel different as the transmission determines the best settings 2 32 When temperatures are very cold the Hydra Matic 6 Speed transmission s gear shifting could be delayed providing more stable shifts until the engine warms up Shifts
305. g is ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are variable When driving your vehicle in AUTO the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is primarily sent to the rear wheels When the vehicle s software determines a need for more traction the system will transfer more power to the front wheels Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than Two Wheel Drive High 4 1 Four Wheel Drive High Use the four wheel high position when you need extra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations This setting also engages your front axle to help drive the vehicle This is the best setting to use when plowing snow 4 Four Wheel Drive Low This setting also engages the front axle and delivers extra torque You may never need this setting It sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose Four Wheel Drive Low if you are driving off road in deep sand deep mud deep snow and while climbing or descending steep hills 2 38 The vehicle has StabiliTrak Shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low will turn Traction Control and StabiliTrak off See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 A CAUTION Shifting the transfer case to N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in N Neutral See Parking Brake on page 2 42 N Neu
306. gate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged If the battery is properly connected and has adequate voltage and the liftgate or liftglass still will not function your vehicle should be taken to a dealership for service Power Liftgate Power Liftgate Operation A CAUTION Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate trunk hatch open or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk hatch or liftgate Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate or trunk hatch open Close all of the windows Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index f the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate disable the power liftgate function For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 46 On vehicles with a power liftgate the button is located on the overhead console The vehicle must be in PARK P to use the power liftgate feature lt lt Press the top of the button to open or close the power liftgate OFF Press the bottom of the button for manual oper
307. ge The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable When the system detects a malfunction the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle A DIC warning message is also displayed The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor The TPMS sensor matching process was started but not completed or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle s tires The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section 5 74 One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See your dealer retailer for service Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle s original equipment tires or wheels Tires and wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle could pre
308. gers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Certification Tire Label GAWH FRT GAWR RR COLD TIRE PRESSURE LE Cc SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver s door The label shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo 4 37 The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle The Certification Tire label also contains information about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out 4 38 A CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These coul
309. ges if a system problem is detected 3 57 If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons you can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays odometer engine hours trip odometer compass zone setting compass recalibration oil life Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter programming and display language If your vehicle has DIC buttons you can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays odometer engine hours trip odometer and display language Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km Engine Hours To display the ENGINE HOURS place the ignition in LOCK OFF or ACC ACCESSORY then press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while viewing the ODOMETER This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run 3 58 Trip Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for the trip odometer The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip odometer is displayed The trip odometer has a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since
310. ght keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also see Checking the Restraint Systems on page 1 98 f Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl rear compartment hinges outer liftgate handle pivot points rear door detent link roller mechanism liftgate handle pivot points latch bolt fuel door hinge cargo door hinge locks and folding seat hardware More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak g Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed clear and free of debris During any maintenance if a power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the underboay care should be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output seals High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing fr
311. ging lanes The passenger side mirror is convex shaped A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat 2 52 Outside Heated Mirrors For vehicles with heated mirrors 3 Rear Window Defogger Press to heat the mirrors See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 25 or Climate Control System on page 3 22 for more information Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system see Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA on page 2 55 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA backing vehicle damage injury or death could For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist occur Even with URPA always check behind the URPA system it operates at speeds less than 5 mph vehicle before backing up While backing be sure 8 km h and assists the driver with parking and to look for objects and check the vehicle s mirrors avoiding objects while in R Reverse The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to an object up to 8 feet 2 5 m behind the vehicle and at The display is located near least 10 inches 25 4 cm off the ground the passenger side rear window and can be seen by looking over your A CAUTION right shoulder The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system does not replace driver vision It cannot detect If you do not use proper care before and while objects that are below the bu
312. ging the transmission see f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 31 N Neutral In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only Also use N Neutral when the vehicle is being towed A CAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of P Park or N Neutral with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle D Drive This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy If you need more power for passing and you are e Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down e Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down By doing this the vehicle shifts down to the next gear and has more power 2 31 D Drive can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You might want to shift the transmission to a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too o
313. ginning of the CD or DVD audio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer press this button to select the next disc if multiple discs are loaded This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a DVD video menu is being displayed press the PROG button to perform the menu function enter Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle 3 136 Audio Steering Wheel Controls Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ depending on the vehicle s options Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel A Next Press to go to the next radio station stored as a favorite or the next track if a CD DVD is playing V C Previous End Press to go to the previous radio station stored as a favorite the next track if a CD DVD is playing to reject an incoming call or end a current call amp 8 Mute Push to Talk Press to silence the vehicle speakers only Press again to turn the sound on For vehicles with OnStar or Bluetooth systems press and hold for longer than two seconds to interact with those systems See OnStar System on page 2 64 and Bl
314. h a Driver Information Center DIC see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 for all brake related DIC messages 3 42 StabiliTrak Indicator Light For vehicles with the StabiliTrak system this light comes on briefly while starting the engine If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the light comes on and stays on while driving there could be a problem with the StabiliTrak system and the vehicle might need service When this warning light is on the StabiliTrak system is off and does not limit wheel spin The light flashes if the system is active and is working to assist the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 for more information Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Canada United States This gage shows the engine coolant temperature It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is working During a majority of the operation the gage reads 210 F 100 C or less If you are pulling a load or going up hills it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 250 F 122 C mark If the gage reaches the 260 F 125 C mark it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity See Engine Overheating on page 5 34 If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more i
315. has a wide variety of programming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound During your trial or when you subscribe you will get unlimited access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in the vehicle A service fee is required to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 in the U S and xmradio ca or call 1 877 438 9677 in Canada Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 3 113 later in this section for further detail Playing a CD Single CD Player Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing 3 91 Playing a CD s Six Disc CD Player LOAD Press this button to load CDs into the CD player This CD player holds up to six CDs To insert one CD 1 Press and release the 7 button 2 Wait for the message to insert the disc 3 Load a CD Insert the CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls the CD in To insert multiple CDs 1 Press and hold the 7 button for two seconds A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays 2 Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert the discs The CD player takes up to six CDs 3 Press the 7 button again to cancel loading more CDs Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing To insert a CD while the ignition is off first press the amp b
316. hat could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the vehicle s interior When cleaning the vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on the vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in the vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning the vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Products that remove odors from the vehicle s upholstery and clean the vehicle s glass can be obtained from your dealer retailer Do not clean the vehicle using A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any in
317. he CD player To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six disc CD player in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play To play the tracks from a CD loaded in the radio with CD and DVD press the DVD CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD or insert a disc partway into the slot A RDM label displays To play tracks from a single CD in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play BAND Press to listen to the radio while a CD is playing The CD remains inside the radio for future listening For the radio with CD and DVD press to listen to the radio while a CD or DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or for viewing entertainment CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to play a CD while listening to the radio The CD icon and a message showing the disc and or track number displays when a CD is in the player Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing the track or chapter number display
318. he customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lamps will not turn on 30 SECONDS default The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds 1 MINUTE The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute 2 MINUTES The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 78 APPROACH LIGHTING This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the customization button until APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter ON default If it is dark enough outside the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed or the vehicle
319. he instructions If either seatback is not locked it could move previously listed under Folding the Seatbacks forward in a sudden stop or crash That could You will not be able to unlatch the seat from cause injury to the person sitting there Always the floor unless the seatback is folded down push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 4 Unlatch the seat from the floor by lifting the lever located next to the carrying handle on the rear of the seat near the bottom 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 5 Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor 1 28 6 Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place 7 Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked Put the seat in this position only when necessary for additional cargo space Returning the Third Row Seat from a Tumbled Position To return the seat to the normal seating position do the following 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat 2 Make sure there is nothing that could become trapped under the seat 3 Release the seat from the tumbled position by lifting the lever located next to the carrying handle at the bottom rear of the seat 4 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor 5 Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright position A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it coul
320. he level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Always use the proper fluid Notice Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When windshield washer fluid needs to be added be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing Adding Washer Fluid The vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message displays you will need to add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for reservoir location Notice When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other
321. he next track For Radios with CD and DVD Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than five seconds on the CD have played If less than five seconds on the CD have played the previous track plays Press the right arrow to go to the next track If either arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD lt lt REV Fast Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this pushbutton to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays bb FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays 3 94 RDM Random With the random setting the tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order To use random Press the CD AUX button or for a single CD player insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player A RDM label displays To play the tracks from the single CD in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play Press the CD AUX button or for a six disc CD player press and hold the N7 button A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays Insert one or more discs partway into the slot of t
322. he seat forward There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat Third Row Seat If the vehicle has a third row seat the seatback s can be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled or removed from the vehicle Folding the Seatback s To fold the seatback do the following 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat 2 Remove all items on the seat cushion Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 3 Lift the release lever located on the bottom rear of the seatback on the outboard side of the seat and the seatback will fold forward 1 27 Unfolding the Seatback s Tumbling the Third Row Seat To return the seatback to the upright position do the The seat can be tumbled forward for additional cargo following space 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat To tumble the seat do the following 2 Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat upright position 2 Make sure the head rests are completely lowered there is nothing under in front of or on the seat and all items are removed from the cupholder AN CAUTION and storage bin if the seat is a two passenger seat 3 Fold the seatbacks forward using t
323. he vehicle has RVC the D On Off button for turning the automatic dimming feature on or off will not be available Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation Automatic dimming reduces the glare from the headlamps of the vehicle behind you The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the ignition is turned to start Cleaning the Mirror Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror Use a soft towel dampened with water Outside Manual Mirrors Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the vehicle and the area behind are seen Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold push the mirror toward the vehicle Push the mirror outward to return to its original position Using hood mounted air deflectors and add on convex mirror attachments could decrease mirror performance Outside Towing Mirrors If the vehicle has towing mirrors they can be adjusted for a clearer view of the objects behind you Manually pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer Manually fold the mirrors forward or rearward The lower portion of the mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved to see more from the driver seat The convex mirror can be adjusted manually to the driver preferred position for better vision The mirror may have a turn signal arrow that flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change
324. height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 Curb Weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 5 67 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side
325. here is something that could damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty and it could be costly The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words CAUTION or Notice Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator CI This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information Vehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean For more information on the symbol refer to the index Adjustable Pedals 9i Airbag Readiness Light X Air Conditioning amp Antilock Brake System ABS t Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar D Brake System Warning Light Charging System amp Cruise Control E Engine Coolant Temperature XX Exterior Lamps iD Fog Lamps B Fuel Gage Al Fuses 3B Headlamp High Low Beam Changer LATCH System Child Restraints C Malfunction Indicator Lamp Y Oil Pressure 4 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors D Power Q Remote Vehicle Start A
326. hone antenna mount a magnetic emergency light magnetic note pad holder or any other magnetic item Turn off the vehicle move the magnetic item then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the compass To calibrate the compass use the following procedure Compass Calibration Procedure 1 Before calibrating the compass make sure the compass zone is set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is located See Compass Variance Zone Procedure earlier in this section Do not operate any switches such as window sunroof climate controls seats etc during the calibration procedure 2 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPAS Compass displays Or if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons press the trip odometer reset stem until CALIBRATE COMPASS displays 3 Press the set reset button to start the compass calibration Or if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for two seconds to start the compass calibration 4 The DIC will display CALIBRATING DRIVE IN CIRCLES Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less than 5 mph 8 km h to complete the calibration The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a few seconds when the calibration is complete The DIC display will then return to the previous menu 3 63 DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action
327. how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare tire See Spare Tire on page 5 106 for additional information How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture Tire Pressure
328. hown previously See your dealer retailer for additional advice and information about using a snow plow on your vehicle Also see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package also have an emergency roof lamp provision package RPO TRW Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is provided above the overhead console See Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp on page 3 18 for switch location 4 43 Towing Towing Your Vehicle To avoid damage the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground Consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly 4 44 Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure to read the
329. ht not work Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playlist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists could cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions To play a large number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display potentially getting cut off Finalize the audio disc before burning it Trying to add music to an existing disc could cause the disc not to function in the player Playlists can be changed by using the lt L previous and 73 gt next folder buttons the 4d knob or the K SEEK Pl arrows MP3 CD R or CD RW that have been recorded without using file folders can be played If a CD R or CD RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 15 playlists and 512 folders and files the player allows access and navigates up to the maximum but all items over the maximum are not accessible 3 103 Root Directory The root directory of the CD R or CD RW is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory displays as the CD label All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files If a disc contains both
330. ht warranty repair Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be supported by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state provincial local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions
331. icle or a bicycle or object is extending out to either side of the vehicle When SBZA is disabled for any reason other than the driver turning it off the driver will not be able to turn SBZA back on using the DIC The SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT ON option will not be selectable if the conditions for normal system operation are not met Until normal operating conditions for SBZA are met you should not rely upon SBZA while driving 2 58 SBZA Error Messages The following messages may appear in the DIC SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF This message indicates that the driver has turned the System off SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS UNAVAILABLE This message indicates that the SBZA system is disabled either because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your blind zone or the vehicle is passing through an open field of view area such as the desert where there is insufficient data for operation The sensor may be blocked by mud dirt snow ice slush or even heavy rainstorms This message may also activate during heavy rain or due to road spray The vehicle does not need service For cleaning see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 110 SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM If this message appears both SBZA displays will remain on indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system If these displays remain on after continued driving the System needs service Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer Rear Vision Camera RVC This
332. icle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park A CAUTION Four wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in N Neutral will allow the vehicle to roll even if the automatic transmission shift lever is in P Park So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N Neutral Always set the parking brake 2 48 Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park on page 2 44 If pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind your vehicle Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror Vehicles with OnStar have three additional control buttons for the OnStar system See your dealer retailer for more information about OnStar and how to subscribe to it See OnStar System on page 2 64 for more information about the services OnStar provides D On Off Press to turn the dimming feature on or off The vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera RVC See Rear Vision Camera RVC on page 2 59 for more information If t
333. if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with roof rail airbags The system checks the airbag electrical system for E malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical as CAUTION problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 37 for more information Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or Where Are the Airbags killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 54 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 57 There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag symbol The driver s frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 83 The right front passenger s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side 1 84 If y
334. ifferent sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 5 78 and Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for additional information 5 80 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional Genera
335. ight on the instrument panel cluster comes on when the tow haul mode is on Tow Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load See Tow Haul Mode on page 2 35 for more information Tow Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle s Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR See Weight of the Trailer earlier in the section Tow Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired Operating the vehicle in Tow Haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage However there is no benefit to the selection of Tow Haul when the vehicle is unloaded Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy Tow Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Trailer Brakes A loaded trailer that weighs more than 2 000 lbs 900 kg needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are install
336. ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 26 for more information 3 83 Setting the Clock MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a Single CD and DVD Player If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD and DVD player it has a clock button for setting the time and date To set the time and date 1 Press the button and the HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels to change it Every time the pushbutton is pressed again the time or the date if selected increases by one Another way to increase the time or date is to press the right Dl SEEK arrow or the PP FWD forward button To decrease the time or date press the left Ki SEEK arrow or the lt lt REV reverse button or turn the 44 tune knob located on the upper right side of the radio to adjust the selected setting 3 84 Changing the Time and Date Default Settings To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month day year to day month year follow these instructions 1 Press the button and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H and 24H and the date MM DD YYYY month day and year and DD MM YYYY day month and year displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under the desired option
337. ild Restraint in the Vehicle A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 66 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint ZN CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly s
338. iler Brake Display Page is displayed each press and release of the gain buttons will then cause the Trailer Gain setting to change Activating the Manual Trailer Brake Apply lever Connecting a trailer equipped with electric trailer brakes All DIC warning and service messages must first be acknowledged by the driver by pressing the odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information button if equipped before the Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed and Trailer Gain can be adjusted TRAILER GAIN This setting is displayed anytime the Trailer Brake Display Page is active This setting can be adjusted from 0 0 to 10 0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected To adjust the Trailer Gain press one of the Trailer Gain adjustment buttons located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel Press and hold a gain button to 4 64 cause the Trailer Gain to continuously adjust To turn the output to the trailer off adjust the Trailer Gain setting to 0 0 zero 0 0 zero gain is the factory default setting To properly adjust trailer gain see the Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure later in this section TRAILER OUTPUT This is displayed any time a trailer with electric brakes is connected Output to the electric brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking present and relative to the Trailer Gain setting Output is displayed from 0 to 10 bars for each gain setting The Trailer Output will indicate on the Trai
339. iler tongue And the weight on the vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how the rig is used For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight 4 53 Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh based upon the vehicle model and options 1500 Series 2WD Short Wheel Base 4 8L V8 4 8L V8 5 3L V8 5 3L V8 5 3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 6 2L V8 1500 Series 2WD Long Wheel Base 5 3L V8 5 3L V8 5 3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 6 0L V8 1500 Series 4WD Short Wheel Base 5 3L V8 5 3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 6 2L V8 4 54 Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR 4 500 Ibs 2 041 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 536 kg 10 300 Ibs 4 672 kg 11 000 Ibs 4 990 kg 5 900 Ibs 2 676 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 216 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 8 500 Ibs 3 856 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 11 000 Ibs 4 990 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 216 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 35
340. ill flash If the key is not placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter during the ten second pre alarm the alarm will go off Your vehicle s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about 30 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power The theft deterrent system will not activate if the doors are locked with the vehicle s key or the manual door lock It activates only if you use the power door lock switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off To avoid setting off the alarm by accident f you do not want to activate the theft deterrent System the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed Always unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm if it is armed If you set off the alarm by accident press unlock on the RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and turn it to START to turn off the alarm The alarm will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way 2 21 Testing the Alarm To test the alarm 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the RKE transmitter
341. ill sound when the driver door is opened the ignition is in ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF and the key is in the ignition 2 25 Retained Accessory Power RAP The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off Audio System Power Windows OnStar System if equipped Sunroof if equipped These features work when the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK OFF the windows and sunroof continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door is opened The radio continues to work for up to 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened Starting the Engine If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information Move the shift lever to P Park or N Neutral The engine will not start in any other position To restart the engine when the vehicle is are already moving use N Neutral only Notice Do not try to shift to P Park if the vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to P Park only when the vehicle is stopped 2 26 Starting Procedure 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts The
342. in the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having the vehicle serviced check with your dealer retailer XM Radio ID If tuned to channel 0 this message alternates with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there could be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer retailer Check XM Receivr If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer XM Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer 3 113 Navigation Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system see the separate Navigation System manual Bluetooth Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls The system can be used while the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft 9 1 m Not all phones support all functions and not all phones are guaranteed to work with the in vehicle Bluetooth system See gm com bluetooth for more information on compatible phones Voice Recognition The Bluetooth system uses voice recogn
343. incline or does the hill get A CAUTION sharply steeper in places e Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be ls there a straight path up or down the hill so you seriously injured or killed When driving up hills will not have to make turning maneuvers always try to go straight up Arethere obstructions on the hill that can block your 2 path such as boulders trees logs or ruts Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If e What is beyond the hill Is there a cliff an the path twists and turns you might want to find embankment a drop off a fence Get out and another route walk the hill if you do not know It is the smart way to Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of find out the hill Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion 4 18 Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to e f the engine has stopped running you need to approaching traffic on trails or hills restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to P Park and restart the engine Then shift to R Reverse release the parking brake and slowly Use headlamps even dur
344. ine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill A CAUTION procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling damaged system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 32 If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as follows 1 You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 2 Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it 3 Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark 5 33 4 With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine
345. ing a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 f the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water 5 108 If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on leather Instr
346. ing cold air in cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available The length of delay depends on the engine coolant temperature Pressing the fan switch will override this delay and change the fan to a selected speed Manual Operation Fan Control Press these buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed Pressing either fan button while in automatic control places the fan under manual control The fan setting remains displayed and the AUTO light turns off The air delivery mode remains under automatic control 4 2 Air Delivery Mode Control Press these buttons to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle Repeatedly press either button until the desired mode appears on the display Pressing either mode button while the system is off changes the air delivery mode without turning the system on Pressing either mode button while in automatic control places the mode under manual control The air delivery mode setting is displayed and the AUTO light turns off The fan remains under automatic control A Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets De Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets Some air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets 3 27 ted Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some to the windshield side window outlets and second row floor outlets In this mode the system automatically selec
347. ing on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer retailer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to safercar gov or
348. ing or road surface conditions change Setting the Trailer Gain properly is needed for the best trailer stopping performance A trailer that is over gained may result in locked trailer brakes A trailer that is under gained may result in not enough trailer braking Both of these conditions may result in poorer stopping and stability of the vehicle and trailer Use the following procedure to correctly adjust Trailer Gain for each towing condition 1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in proper working condition 2 Connect a properly loaded trailer to the vehicle and make all necessary mechanical and electrical connections See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 for more information 3 After the electrical connection is made to a trailer equipped with electric brakes A TRAILER CONNECTED message will be briefly displayed on the DIC display The Trailer Brake Display Page will appear on the DIC showing TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT E In the Trailer Output display on the DIC mobs will disappear if there is no error present Connecting a trailer without electric brakes will not clear the six dashed lines 4 Adjust the Trailer Gain by using the gain adjustment buttons on the Trailer Brake Control Panel 4 65 5 Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level road surface representative of the towing condition and free of traffic at about 20 to 25 mph 32 to 40 km h and fully apply the Manual Trailer Br
349. ing the day to make the back down the hill as straight as possible in vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic R Reverse While backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position so you can A CAUTION c tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as you back down It is best to back down the hill with the wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you are there Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert If the vehicle stalls or is about to stall and you cannot make it up the hill Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards and apply the parking brake f the engine is still running shift the transmission to R Reverse release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in R Reverse Things not to do if the vehicle stalls or is about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into N Neutral to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This will not work The vehicle can roll backward very quickl
350. ins the infrared transmitters for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers for the remote control They are located at the rear of the console Notice Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window at the rear of the overhead console and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries might need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight could also affect the function of the remote control If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot the remote control power button can be used to turn on the video screen display and start the disc The radio can also turn on the video screen display See Radio s on page 3 86 for more information Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it and the repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the remote control stored in a cool dry place 3 129 Remote Control Buttons D Power Press this button to turn the video screen on and off Y Illumination Press this button to turn the remote contr
351. into the trim slot 5 Pull lightly on the cover holder to make sure it is secure On extended wheelbase models there are two cover positions The slots furthest forward allow the cover to be used if the third seat is removed or folded down The cover can be installed and removed from either side Sunroof Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof To open or close the sunroof the ignition needs to be turned to ON RUN or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active When RAP is active the sunroof will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off or until a front door is opened See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 26 for more information There are two switches in the overhead console that operate the sunroof Manual Open Manual Close To open the sunroof press and hold the rear of the driver s side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position To close the sunroof press and hold the front of the driver s side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof but can also be opened manually 2 77 The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to the full open position From the comfort stop position press the rear of the driver s side switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full open position When the sunroof is opened an air deflector will automatically raise Th
352. ioned on the left ear The symbol R Right appears on the upper right side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the right ear Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones become worn or damaged the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set See your dealer retailer for more information Battery Replacement To change the batteries on the headphones 1 Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones Slide the battery door open 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Audio Video A V Jacks The A V jacks located on the rear of the floor console allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system Adapter connectors or cables not included might be required to connect the auxiliary device to the A V jacks Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for p
353. ir facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your dealer retailer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash Check to make sure that you are all right If you are uninjured make sure tha
354. irming that programming is successful and complete To program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home automation device repeat Steps 1 through 5 choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what was used for the garage door opener If these instructions do not work the garage door opener is probably a Fixed Code unit Follow the Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code garage door opener Programming Universal Home Remote Fixed Code For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 866 572 2728 or go to learcar2u com Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed Code units Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before starting Otherwise the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated 2 70 To program up to three devices 123456789 011 le CTS 206 12 Tl24 1 To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit remove the battery cover on the hand held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the garage door opener motor If there are a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above the garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit If you do not see a row of dip switches return to the previous section for Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code Your hand held transmitter can have between eight to 12 dip s
355. is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the check engine light comes on and stays on while the engine is running this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice f the vehicle is continually driven with this light on after a while the emission controls might not work as well the vehicle s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect the vehicle s emission controls and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
356. ise control has been set to the desired speed A CAUTION If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Press the e button 2 Get up to the desired speed 3 Press the SET button located on the steering wheel and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied this shuts off the cruise control But it does not need to be reset Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph 40 km h or more press the RES button on the steering wheel The vehicle returns to the previously set speed and stays there Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control Press and hold the RES button on the steering wheel until the desired speed is reached then release it To increase vehicle speed in small increments press the RES button Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster 3 13 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control To reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the SET button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached then release it To slow down in very small am
357. it To display the odometer reading with the ignition off press the reset button Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm 3 36 Safety Belt Reminders Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt unless the driver safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light comes on and stays on for several seconds then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the driver safety belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 90 for more information The passenger safety belt light located on the instrument panel comes on and stays on for several seconds and then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion 2 If the passenger safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop
358. it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will come on when the following conditions are met The ignition is on The exterior lamps control is in AUTO The transmission is not in P Park The light sensor determines it is daytime When the DRL are on only the DRL lamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker instrument panel lights and other lamps will not be on When it begins to get dark the automatic headlamp system will switch from DRL to the headlamps To turn off the DRL lamps turn the exterior lamps control to the OFF position and then release For vehicles first sold in Canada the transmission must be in the P Park position before the DRL lamps can be turned off Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside the automatic headlamp system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness along with the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim To turn off the automatic headlamp system turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release it For vehicles first sold in Canada the transmission must be in the P Park position before the automatic headlamp system can be turned off The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille tha
359. ith the engine running be sure your vehicle is in P Park and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you move the shift lever into P Park hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from P Park without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P Park Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into P Park properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P Park This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into P Park properly before you leave the driver seat To find out how see Shifting Into Park on page 2 44 When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of P Park before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission then you will be able to pull the shift lever out of P Park Shifting Out of Park This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system The shift lock release is designed to Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P Park with the shift lever button fully released and Prevent movement of the shift lever
360. ition to interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags Noise Keep interior noise levels to a minimum The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise When to Speak A short tone sounds after the system responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice command Wait until the tone and then speak How to Speak Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice 3 114 Audio System When using the in vehicle Bluetooth system sound comes through the vehicle s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system Use the audio system volume knob during a call to change the volume level The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls To prevent missed calls a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low Bluetooth Controls Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate the in vehicle Bluetooth system See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 136 for more information 6 We Push To Talk Press to answer incoming calls to confirm system information and to start speech recognition C amp D V Phone On Hook Press to end a call reject a call or to cancel an operation Pairing A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used See the cell phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone If a Blu
361. itions the RSE system might not work until the temperature is within the operating range The operating range for the RSE system is above 4 F 20 C or below 140 F 60 C If the temperature of the vehicle is outside of this range heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the operating range of the RSE system Parental Control The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature depending on which radio the vehicle has To enable Parental Control press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds to stop all system features such as radio video screen RSA DVD and or CD While Parental Control is on a padlock icon displays The radio can be turned back on with a single press of the power button but the RSE system will remain under Parental Control To turn Parental Control off press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds The RSE returns from where it was previously left and the padlock icon disappears from the radio display Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or ejecting any disc pressing the play icon on the radio DVD display menu or changing an ignition position 3 125 Headphones The RSE includes two 2 channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to this system Channel 1 is dedicated to the DVD player while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections These headphones are used to listen to media such as CDs DVDs MP3s DVDAs radio any au
362. ive safely If the blades do become damaged install new blades or blade inserts For more information see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 59 Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down Clear away Snow or ice to prevent an overload Rainsense Wipers For vehicles with Rainsense I windshield wipers the moisture sensor is located next to the inside rearview mirror and is mounted on the windshield When active these sensors are able to detect moisture on the windshield and automatically turn on the wipers To turn on the Rainsense feature the wipers must be set to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction lever Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity of the sensor Since different drivers have different setting preferences it is recommended that the mid range setting position 3 be used initially For more wipes select the higher settings for fewer wipes select the lower settings located closer to the off position on the multifunction lever The sensor will automatically control the frequency of the wipes from the off setting to the high speed setting according to the weather conditions The wipers can be left in a rainsense mode even when it is not raining When Rainsense is active the headlamps will turn on automatically if the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position and the wipers are active Notice Going thr
363. iver acknowledges this message off or if the trailer harness is re connected If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving this message will continue until the ignition is turned off This message will also turn off if the driver acknowledges this message off or if the trailer harness is re connected 2 There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the electric trailer brakes This message will continue as long as there is an electrical fault in the trailer wiring This message will also turn off if the driver acknowledges this message off To determine if the electrical fault is on the vehicle side or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection do the following 1 Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the vehicle 2 Turn the ignition OFF 3 Wait ten seconds then turn the ignition back to RUN 4 If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message re appears the electrical fault is on the vehicle side If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only re appears when connecting the trailer wiring harness to the vehicle the electrical fault is on the trailer side SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM This message will be displayed when there is a problem with the ITBC system If this message persists over multiple ignition cycles there is problem with the ITBC system Take the vehicle to an authorized dealer retailer to have the ITBC system diagnosed and repaired If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYS
364. just Button If Equipped See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2 27 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 53 If Equipped Heated Windshield Washer Fluid Button If Equipped See Windshield Washer on page 3 10 Power Assist Steps on page 2 17 If Equipped Glove Box on page 2 74 Hazard Warning Flashers A Hazard Warning Flasher Press this button located on top of the steering column to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off This warns others that you are having trouble Press again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on the vehicle s turn signals will not work Horn To sound the horn press the center pad on the steering wheel Tilt Wheel The vehicle has a tilt wheel that lets the steering wheel be adjusted The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the lower left side of the column To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the lever Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Turn Signal Multifunction Lever oN NIZ Q The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following Turn and Lane Change Signals 2D D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer Rear Wiper Delay ot ea Rear Wiper GO Rear Wiper Wash Flash to Pass Information
365. justment Buttons The ITBC system has a control panel located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column See Instrument Panel Overview on page 3 4 for more information on location The control panel allows adjustment the amount of output referred to as trailer gain available to the electric trailer brakes and allows manual application the trailer brakes The Trailer Brake Control Panel is used along with the Trailer Brake Display Page on the DIC to adjust and display power output to the trailer brakes Trailer Brake DIC Display Page The ITBC system displays messages into the vehicle s Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 for more information The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting power output to the electric trailer brakes trailer connection and system operational status TRAILER GAIN 4 OUTPUT HEEEEE TRAILER GAIN 6 0 A Trailer Gain Setting B Power Output to Trailer Brakes C No trailer with electric brakes connected or fault present 4 63 The Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed by performing any of the following actions Scrolling through the DIC menu pages using the odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information button if equipped Pressing a Trailer Gain button If the Trailer Brake Display Page is not currently displayed pressing a Trailer Gain button will first recall the current Trailer Gain setting After the Tra
366. k of full or partial ejection in rollover events although no system can prevent all such ejections But airbags would not help in many types of collisions primarily because the occupant s motion is not toward those airbags See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 86 for more information Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After the frontal airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes For location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 88 The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle ZN CAUTION When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of
367. keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with glass cleaner Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent Wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades Bugs road grime sap and a buildup of vehicle wash wax treatments may cause wiper streaking Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged Wipers can be damaged by Extreme dusty conditions Sand and salt Heat and sun Snow and ice without proper removal 5 111 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels and Trim The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium calcium or sodium chloride These chlorides are used on roads
368. kwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground 5 Remove all of the wheel nuts A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack ZN CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 6 Take off the flat tire 7 Remove any rust or dirt 8 Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end from the wheel bolts of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the mounting surfaces and spare tire spare wheel A CAUTION Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose The vehicle s wheel could fall off causing a crash 9 Tighten each wheel nut by hand Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel A CAUTION is held against the hub 10 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle Lower the jack completely Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an 11 Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
369. l F Hoist Cable K Spare Tire Lock G Tire Wheel Retainer 5 102 1 Put the tire H on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear 3 Assemble the two jack handle extensions D and wheel wrench E as shown 2 Tilt the tire toward the vehicle Separate the tire wheel retainer G from the guide pin Pull the pin through the center of the wheel Tilt the retainer down through the center wheel opening Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel 5 103 4 Insert the open end of the extension J through the hole in the rear bumper I hoist shaft access hole 5 Raise the tire part way upward Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening 6 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 5 104 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull A and then try to turn B the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable Reinstall the spare tire lock Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover To store the tools do the following A Wheel Blocks E Jack B Tool Bag with Jack F Wing Nut Retaining Tools Wheel Blocks C Retaining Bracket G Jack Knob D Wing Nut Retaining Tool Bag 1 Return the tools wheel wrench jack handle and jack handle
370. l This could be a sign that brake service might be required Brake Adjustment Every brake stop the disc brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking The vehicle was designed and tested with top quality brake parts When parts of the braking system are replaced for example when the brake linings wear down and new ones are installed be sure to get new approved replacement parts If this is not done the brakes might not work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle the balance between the front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed Battery If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information This vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery see your dealer retailer for one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for battery location Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage
371. l Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard N
372. l System on page 3 22 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 25 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way If your vehicle has a power liftgate disable the power liftgate function See Engine Exhaust on page 2 46 If your vehicle has a power liftgate see Power Liftgate on page 2 14 To unlock the liftgate use the power door lock switch or press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 On vehicles with a liftglass press the button on the underside of the license pocket applique A to open it The liftglass can also be opened by pressing the liftglass release button on the RKE To open the entire liftgate press the touchpad on the underside of the liftgate handle B The vehicle must be in PARK P to open the liftgate To close the liftgate use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if the rear wipers are in motion Attempting to open the liftgate or liftglass while the rear wipers are in motion will cause the release of the liftglass or liftgate to delay until the wipers are moved off the liftglass Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric latch If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage the liftglass and liftgate will not open The liftglass and lift
373. l and Mountain Roads sseseeeeeese 4 28 Hood Checking Things Under sssesssess 5 12 Release hornier psa Er eeu ed PEE 5 13 POTM ERR a LUC T 3 6 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 37 Ignition POoSItIOLS iiec rodent b tonne t Rei 2 25 Infants and Young Children Restraints 1 57 Inflation Tire Pressure sees 5 70 Instrument Panel Brightness d EIER RB Sie 3 19 Cluster E 3 35 QNI E rm 3 4 INMFOGUCHION BRE RP rcm 6 2 JUMP Starting tS 5 44 K Keyless Entry Remote Operation 2 5 Keyless Entry System esses 2 4 Cy Em 2 3 Labeling Tire Sidewall sssessussse 5 62 Lamp Malfunction Indicator seeseeeeeesee 3 44 Lamps Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp 3 18 Daytime Running DRL esee 3 16 Do 3 19 Dome Lamp Override sssesesssse 3 19 License Plale eoe innt peie 5 58 pisse anise EA 3 20 Pap Belt T 1 52 Lap Shoulder Belt cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeneees 1 45 LATCH System for Child Restraints 1 66 Level Control esss 4 51 Eiftgate POoWet 5 Ie tete eve d teal 2 14 Liftgate Liftglass cene 2 12 Liftglass liftgate riens 2 12 Lighting EMY er 3 19 210 e ERES 3 19 Lights Airbag
374. label is attached to the center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds 4 34 The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5 61 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axles See Certification Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capaci
375. lace Recommended Action No power The ignition might not be turned ON RUN or in ACC ACCESSORY The picture does not fill the Check the display mode screen There are black settings in the setup menu by pressing the display menu button on the remote control borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out In auxiliary mode the Check the auxiliary input picture moves or scrolls connections at both devices Recommended Action The remote control does not work After stopping the player push Play but sometimes the DVD starts where left off and sometimes at the beginning The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly If the stop button was pressed one time the DVD player resumes playing where the DVD was stopped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Recommended Action Sometimes the wireless Check for obstructions headphone audio cuts out low batteries reception or buzzes range and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using a cellular telephone in the vehicle Ch
376. lace Some examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in a crash hills tall buildings tunnels weather or wireless phone network congestion Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red the system may not be functioning properly Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic If the light appears clear no light is appearing your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated Press the OnStar button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active Universal Home Remote System The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand held Radio Frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home lighting This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authori
377. ld not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information 3 47 Oil Pressure Light ZN CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The engine can become so hot that it catches fire Someone could be burned Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil 3 48 This light comes on briefly while starting the engine If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the light comes on and stays on it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly The vehicle could be low on oil and it might have some other system problem Security Light For information regarding this light and the vehicle s security system see Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 21 Fog Lamp Light 0 The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off See Fog Lamps on page 3 18 for more information The fog lamp light comes on when the fog lamps are in use Cruise Control Light The cruise control light comes on whenever the 4 cruise control is set
378. ld restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 1 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 3 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors 1 71 2 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor if the vehicle has one Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 2 1 Find the top tether anchor 2 2 Route attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback 1 72 If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether around the headrest or head restraint If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts 3 Push and pull the child rest
379. ld riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child ina forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though the airbag is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat 1 91 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if The right front passenger seat is unoccupied The syst
380. ld them one time using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position Turn Signal Indicator The vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the mirror An arrow on the mirror flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change Ground Illumination Lamps The mirrors may also include ground illumination lamps in the base of the mirror These lamps help to see the area near the base of the front doors when it is dark out Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror Vehicles with this feature have a driver outside mirror that adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 2 48 for more information Park Tilt Mirrors Vehicles with the memory package have a passenger and or driver mirror that tilts to a preselected position when the vehicle is in R Reverse This feature lets the driver view the curb when parallel parking The mirror s return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of R Reverse or the ignition is turned off Turn this feature on or off through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 for more information 2 51 Outside Convex Mirror A CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on the right Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before chan
381. le make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Notice lt is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle warranty Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 5 15 Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 29 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Inspect the vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire if the vehicle has one See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 lf the vehicle has a spare tire check to make sure it is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 86 Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 76 6 10 At Least Once a
382. le and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be attached using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments 1 66 Lower Anchors Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments B Top Tether Anchor A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child restraint connects to the top te
383. le has a heavy load you might notice an increase in the effort to shift out of P Park See Torque Lock Automatic Transmission under Shifting Into Park on page 2 44 for more information 2 30 A CAUTION It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park See Shifting Into Park on page 2 44 f you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 A CAUTION If you have Four Wheel Drive the vehicle will be free to roll even if the shift lever is in P Park if the transfer case is in Neutral So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear Two Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive Low not in Neutral See Shifting Into Park on page 2 44 R Reverse Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to R Reverse while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Shift to R Reverse only after the vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without dama
384. le s lights press and hold the remote start button for two to four seconds Pressing the remote start button again after the vehicle has started will turn the engine off When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done 3 If itis the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven repeat these steps while the engine is still running to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes Remote start can be extended one time After entering the vehicle during a remote start insert and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle To manually shut off a remote start do any of the following Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off Turn on the hazard warning flashers Turn the ignition switch on and then off The vehicle can be remote started two separate times between driving sequences The engine will run for 10 minutes after each remote start Or you can extend the engine run time by another 10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time frame and before the engine stops For example if the lock button and then the remote start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has been running for five minutes 10 minutes are added allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes The
385. lease say dial or call 3 Use the dial or call command to dial the number of the third party to be called 4 Once the call is connected press to link all the callers together Ending a Call Press Cx V to end a call 3 121 Muting a Call During a call all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them To Mute a call 1 Press amp The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Mute Call The system responds with Call muted To Cancel Mute 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Mute Call The system responds with Resuming call 3 122 Transferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the in vehicle Bluetooth system and the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Transfer Call The system responds with Transferring call and the audio will switch from the vehicle to the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the In Vehicle Bluetooth System The cellular phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred The connection process can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position During a call with the audio on the cell phone
386. ler Brake Display Page whenever the following occur No trailer is connected Atrailer without electric brakes is connected no DIC message is displayed Atrailer with electric brakes has become disconnected a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message will also be displayed on the DIC There is a fault present in the wiring to the electric trailer brakes a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message will also be displayed on the DIC There is a fault in the ITBC system a SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message will also be displayed in the DIC Manual Trailer Brake Apply The Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever is located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel and is used to apply the trailer s electric brakes independent of the vehicle s brakes This lever is used in the Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure to properly adjust the power output to the trailer brakes Sliding the lever to the left will apply only the trailer brakes The power output to the trailer is indicated in the Trailer Brake Display Page in the DIC If the vehicle s service brakes are applied while using the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever the trailer output power will be the greater of the two The trailer and the vehicle s brake lamps will come on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering condition and must be adjusted any time vehicle loading trailer load
387. life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally the oil must be changed at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Whenever the oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message coming on reset the system Always reset the engine oil life to 100 after every oil change It will not reset itself To reset the Engine Oil Life System 1 Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons the vehicle must be in P Park to access this display See DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 52 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 57 2 Press and hold the SET RESET button on the DIC or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does not have DI
388. lippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited 4 12 While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until the vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Antilock Brake System ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Off Road Driving Vehicles with four wheel drive can be used for off road driving Vehicles without four wheel drive and vehicles with 20 inch tire wheel assemblies should not be driven off road except on a level solid surface The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road and this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Off
389. ll deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver s seat The seat position sensor provides information that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment Your vehicle may or may not have roof rail airbags See Airbag System on page 1 81 Roof rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes In addition these roof rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact Roof rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Roof rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts Both roof rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over or in a severe frontal impact In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For roof rail airbags deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact In a rollover event roof rail airbag deployment i
390. lly freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving Fuel range cannot be reset Average Economy Press the trip fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km This number is calculated based on the number of mpg L 100 km recorded since the last time this menu item was reset To reset AVG ECONOMY press and hold the set reset button 3 54 Fuel Used Press the trip fuel button until FUEL USED displays This display shows the number of gallons gal or liters L of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item To reset the fuel used information press and hold the set reset button while FUEL USED is displayed Timer Press the trip fuel button until TIMER displays This display can be used as a timer To start the timer press the set reset button while TIMER is displayed The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will return to zero To stop the timer press the set reset button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the set reset button while TIMER is displayed T
391. loth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 110 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer If the vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to
392. low the cross hatched area for a cold check or in the HOT or cross hatched area for a hot check Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an then pull it back out again accurate reading 5 f the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously Consistency repeatable readings is important to maintaining proper fluid level If readings are still inconsistent contact your dealer retailer 5 23 How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Using a funnel add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Do not overfill Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as
393. lways back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle The vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps also flash telling other drivers the vehicle is turning changing lanes or stopping When towing a trailer the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade If the transmission is not shifted down the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well Vehicles can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions The tow haul mode may be used if the transmission
394. m may result in the storage of destinations addresses telephone numbers and other trip information Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions Radio Frequency Identification RFID RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking unlocking and starting and in vehicle transmitters for garage door openers RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information A Accessories and Modifications 5 3 Accessory POWER irse i ite de the iar ERR IEEE 2 26 Accessory Power Outlets cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 21 Active Fuel Management ceecee 2 29 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment 4 40 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Minorem ETE 1 96 Additional Required Services Scheduled Malntenarece i toot nete oath eee 6 6 Additives Fuel cseessesseseer 5 6 Add On Electrical Equipment 5 114 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 27 Air Cleaner Filter Engine ssusssssse 5 19 Air Conditionirig 1 ecrit eene dott 3 22 Airbag Readiness Light esee 3 37 Airbag System tees cenae creo ede es
395. mage could result Rear Seat Audio RSA Vehicles with this feature allow the rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources radio CDs DVDs or other auxiliary sources However the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources the front seat passengers are not listening to except on some radios where dual control is allowed For example rear seat passengers can control and listen to a CD through the headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones The RSA functions operate even when the main radio is off The front audio system will display the headphone icon when the RSA is on and will disappear from the display when it is off Audio can be heard through wired headphones not included plugged into the jacks on the RSA If the vehicle has this feature audio can also be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the RSA audio is active through the headphones o Power Press the o button to turn the RSA on or off Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio AM FM XM if equipped CD and if the vehicle has these
396. maller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner Care of CDs If playing a CD R the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R or CD RW quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R or CD RW has been handled Handle them carefully Store CD R s or CD RW s in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD or DVD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly or not at all Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge If the surface of a CD is soiled clean it with a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Care of the CD and DVD Player Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD or DVD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism
397. mber it responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone 5 Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system responds with About to store name tag Does that sound OK f the name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 f the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu Using the Digit Store Command The digit store command allows a phone number to be stored by entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Digit Store The system responds with Please say the first digit to store followed by a tone 3 117 3 Say the first digit to be stored The system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be stored is complete e f an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the System say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them 4 After the complete number has been entered say Store The system responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone 5 Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system responds with About to store name tag Does that sound OK e f the name
398. me out only in level surface LOCK OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake Contact your dealer retailer if service is required on page 2 42 Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move Parking Brake and Automatic Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill i k h ki Transmission P Park Mechanism ee your foot on the regular brake set the parking Check To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in N Neutral slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake AN CAUTION edd Do this until the vehicle is held ie parking brake only When you are doing this check the vehicle could To check the P Park mechanism s holding ability begin to move You or others could be injured and With the engine running shift to P Park Then property could be damaged Make sure there is release the parking brake followed by the regular room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll brake Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should Contact your dealer retailer if service is required the vehicle begin to move Hood and Liftgate Support Gas Strut Service Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear corrosion cracks loss of lubricant or other damage Check the hold open ability of gas strut If necessary replace with genuine parts from your dealer retailer Underbody Flushing Service At least every
399. moderate to severe frontal near frontal or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met And if the vehicle has side impact airbags safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event Pretensioners work only once If the pretensioners activate in a crash they will need to be replaced and probably other new parts for the vehicle s safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1 99 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the second row seat and the third row if the vehicle has one Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt Third Row If your vehicle has a third row remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seat Second Row 1 For the second row remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body 1 49 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat edges of the belt into the slots of the guide The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top 1 50 A CAUTION A safety belt that is not prop
400. mper underneath the vehicle or if they are too close or far from the vehicle URPA uses three color coded lights to provide distance children pedestrians bicyclists or pets and system information CAUTION Continued 2 53 How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into R Reverse The rear display briefly illuminates to indicate the system is working URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph 8 km h If the vehicle is above this speed the red light on the rear display will flash To be detected objects must be at least 10 inches 25 4 cm off the ground and below liftgate level Objects must also be within 8 feet 2 5 m from the rear bumper This distance may be less during warmer or humid weather A single beep will sound the first time an object is detected between 40 inches 1 m and 8 feet 2 5 m away Beeping will occur continuously when the vehicle is at 23 inches 0 6 m or closer to an object 2 54 The following describes what will occur with the URPA display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object amber light amber amber lights amber amber red lights and continuous beeping for five seconds amber amber red lights flashing and continuous beeping for five seconds The system can be disabled by pressing the rear park aid disable button located next to the radio The indicator light will come on and PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the Drive
401. n Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down On seats with power reclining seatbacks the control is located behind the power seat control on the outboard side of the seats See Power Reclining Seatbacks under Heclining Seatbacks on page 1 10 A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 1 8 for more information Driver s Seat with Power Seat Control Power Recline and Power Lumbar shown On a vehicle with power seats the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward Manual Lumbar Power Lumbar On vehicles with this feature the control is located on the outboard side of the seat Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the knob forward or rearward On seats with power lumbar the controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats To increase lumbar support press and hold the front of the control To decrease lumbar support press and hold the rear of the control 1 6 The vehicle may have additional features to adjust your vehicle s power seat To raise the height of the lumbar support press and hold the top of the control To lower the h
402. n Playing a DVD DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 125 for more information D Power Press to turn the radio on or off Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume Press and hold for more than two seconds to turn off the radio and Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system and to start the parental control feature Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio RSA system or remote control A lock symbol displays next to the clock display The parental control feature remains on until this knob is pressed and held for more
403. n P Park To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off 2 Press the customization button to scroll through the available customizable options Feature Settings Menu Items The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle DISPLAY IN ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to display all DIC messages in English DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English FRANCAIS All messages will appear in French ESPANOL All messages will appear in Spanish NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC You can also change the language by pressing the trip odometer reset stem See
404. n See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 43 3 65 ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 5 34 for more information This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 43 See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 37 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 5 34 for more information This message displays and a chime sounds if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage This message clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature 3 66 ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays and a chime sounds when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode See Engine Overheating on
405. n overheat causing an engine compartment fire or other damage Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer For information about using tire chains on the vehicle see Tire Chains on page 5 84 4 31 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels For four wheel drive vehicles shift into Four Wheel High or Four Wheel Low For vehicles with StabiliTrak turn the traction control part of the system off Shift back and forth between R Reverse and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible To prevent transmission wear wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears Release the accelerator pedal while shifting and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries it might need to be towed out Recovery hooks can be used if the vehicle has them If the vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 44 4 32 Recovery Hooks A CAUTION These hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable s
406. n owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often or the same type of claim is made many times Services Provided Emergency Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station Lock Out Service Service is provided to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar For security reasons the driver must present identification before this service is given Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway Tow to the nearest GMC dealer for warranty service or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand mud or snow Flat Tire Change Service is provided to change a flat tire with the spare tire The spare tire if equipped must be in good condition and properly inflated It is the owner s responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty Battery Jump Start Service is provided to jump start a dead battery Trip Routing Service Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route Additional travel information is also available Allow three weeks for delivery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km Po
407. n the belt 6 If the child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 66 for more information 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position ZN CAUTION A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position 1 77 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position This vehicle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 64 In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 90 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 38 for more information including important safety information A label on the sun visor says Never put
408. n there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that explains what to do Follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous Instrument Panel Cluster United States 4 Speed version shown 6 Speed and Canada similar The instrument cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running It shows how fast the vehicle is going about how much fuel the vehicle has and many other things needed to drive safely and economically For vehicles with a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information 3 35 Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer shows the vehicle s speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada Trip Odometer The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero Press the reset button located on the instrument panel cluster next to the trip odometer display to toggle between the trip odometer and the regular odometer Holding the reset button for approximately one second while the trip odometer is displayed resets
409. napping back S AS OS SS D f CLA IA c pe wee Notice Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle you can use them if you are stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving Loading the Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label ZN CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle 4 33 Tire and Loading Information Label M AT ON REAR The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX X UICE or v Ibs SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
410. nd rear of the floor console or in the fold down armrest adjust the front cupholders by moving the insert forward or rearward 2 74 Pull downward on the lid to access the rear floor console cupholders There could also be cupholders located in the second and third row seat armrest areas Center Console Storage For vehicles with a console compartment it is located between the bucket seats Press the button and lift the lid to access the console compartment A cupholder located in the rear of the console swings down for the rear seat passenger to use Luggage Carrier Notice Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 200 Ibs 91 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle can damage the vehicle Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely For vehicles with a luggage carrier items can be loaded on top of the vehicle The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof It can also have crossrails which can be moved back and forth to help secure cargo Tie the load to the siderails or siderail supports Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 Make sure the cargo is properly loaded To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving periodically stop and check to make sure cargo is s
411. nd row seats Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls they are integrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rear controls Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls A Fan Control B Air Delivery Mode Control C Temperature Control REAR Press the REAR button on the front climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or off An indicator comes on when the rear system is on The rear climate control system can also be turned off by pressing and holding the button To turn the system on from the rear seats press any rear climate control button except the button Mimic Mode This mode matches the rear climate control to the front climate control airflow settings It comes on when REAR is pressed the first time Independent Mode This mode directs rear seating airflow according to the settings of the rear controls To turn the system on from the rear press any rear climate control button except the button 3 33 Automatic Operation If Equipped AUTO Press the air delivery mode button until this setting is selected to control the inside temperature air delivery and fan speed AUTO appears in the display when automatic operation is active Increase Decrease T
412. nder the play pause symbol tag displayed on the radio If the DVD still does not play refer to the on screen instructions if available E Stop Press to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD lt Enter Press to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu Menu Press to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the pushbuttons located under the navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through the DVD menu After making a selection press this button This button only operates when using a DVD Nav Navigate Press to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus amp gt Return Press to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active DVD A Audio Display Buttons Once a DVD A is inserted radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback See the tag options listed after for more information The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD A menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Hear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 125 for more information The Video Screen does not automatically power on when the DVD A is inserted into the DVD slot It must be manually turned on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control power button g
413. ne air cleaner filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1 through 6 When the engine air cleaner filter is removed lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt If the engine air cleaner filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner Filter 1 Locate the air cleaner filter assembly See Engine Compartment Overview on eee SN rto SUY cc SAT M SOON 2L the f th verot ihe fes 3 Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the POSER TOUT SCIEWS OM IE Covel OLME NOUSINY housing Care should be taken to dislodge as and lift up the cover little dirt as possible 4 Clean the engine air cleaner filter sealing surfaces and the housing 5 20 5 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter 6 Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws ZN CAUTION Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Speed Transmission When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Additional Requi
414. ne of the crash They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states provinces with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a dealer retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depend
415. nformation Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system this light comes on briefly when the engine e is started It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly underinflated A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center DIC can accompany the light See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 for more information Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so If a tire is underinflated inflate to the proper pressure See Tires on page 5 61 for more information 3 43 When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 71 for more information Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment 3 44 This light should come on when the ignition is on but the engine is not running as a check to show it
416. ng 5 58 3 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket 4 Install the new bulb 5 Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license plate lamp Replacement Bulbs If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Back up Lamp 7441 Rear Turn Signal Lamp Taillamp and Stoplamp 3057KX License Plate Lamp For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your dealer retailer Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways To replace the wiper blade assembly 1 Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from the windshield 2 Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the blade and turn the blade assembly away from the arm connector 3 Install the new blade onto the arm connector and make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the locked position For the proper type and size see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 15 5 59 Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement 1 Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the park rest position 4 Replace the wiper blade 5 Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest position 2 Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the backglass The backglass
417. ng compass zone setting and compass recalibration Customization Press this button to customize the feature settings on your vehicle See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 for more information V Set Reset Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC Trip Fuel Menu Items ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Odometer Press the trip fuel button until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the odometer To switch between English and metric measurements see Units later in this section Trip Odometer Press the trip fuel button until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for the trip odometer Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometer The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the set reset button while the trip odometer is displayed You can also reset the trip odometer while it is displayed by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem The trip odometer has a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned on
418. ng and better fuel economy during engine warm up in cold weather conditions at or below 0 F 18 C Vehicles with an engine heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting An internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 0 F 18 C To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment near the power steering fluid reservoir 3 Plug the cord into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet 2 28 A CAUTION Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you do not it could be damaged The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors Ask a dealer retailer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this Active Fuel Management Vehicles with V8 engines may have Active Fuel Management This system
419. ng information has many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer Pulling A Trailer Here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure the rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control See Hitches later in this section e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Vehicles can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions fthe vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA System and it doesn t seem to be working properly while pulling a trailer turn the system off See Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA on page 2 55 for more information Three important considerations have to do with weight The weight of the trailer The weight of the tra
420. ng to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the 44 knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either SEEK arrow gt FWD forward or lt lt REV reverse button until the desired levels are obtained If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble To quickly adjust bass midrange or treble to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BASS MID or TREB label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press the 44 knob for more than two seconds 3 89 EQ Equalization Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music The choices are pop rock country talk jazz and classical Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source If the radio has a Bose audio system the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust balance or fade press the Jd knob until the speaker control labels display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the 44 knob clo
421. nger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC REAR ACCESS OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in ON RUN Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate and liftglass Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to your vehicle See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 and DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 52 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 57 for more information 3 68 REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter battery is low The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC SERVICE 4 WH
422. nger third row seat there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion that can be used for the rear driver side seating position in the third row Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion that can be used for either the third row center or driver side seating position Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor 1 70 Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint System or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 64 for additional information Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System A CAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Install a LATCH type child restraint properly using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with the child
423. ngers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked So all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle From the outside use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the key in the driver s door From the inside use the power door locks or manual door locks To lock or unlock the door with the manual locks push down or pull up on the manual lock knob Power Door Locks On vehicles with power door locks the switches are located on the front doors m Unlock Press to unlock the doors Lock Remove the key from the ignition and press to lock the doors Delayed Locking When locking the doors with the power lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes
424. ngs OFF default Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse DRIVER MIRROR The driver s outside mirror will be titted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse PASSENGER MIRROR The passengers outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse BOTH MIRRORS The driver s and passenger s outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 79 EASY EXIT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 1 8 for more information Press the customization button until EASY EXIT RECALL appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings DOOR BUTTON ONLY No automatic seat exit recall will occur The recall will only occur after pressing the easy exit seat button BUTTON amp KEY OUT default If the features are enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu the driver s seat will move back when the key is removed from the ignition or after pressing the easy exit seat button The automatic
425. nob to the Four Wheel Drive Low position You must wait for the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission into gear Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging the vehicle always wait for the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear The vehicle may have significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four Wheel Drive Low and Four Wheel Drive High ranges or from N Neutral while the engine is running If the knob is turned to the Four Wheel Drive Low position when the vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 5 km h and the transmission is in N Neutral After 30 seconds the transfer case will shift to Four Wheel Drive High mode 2 39 Shifting Out of Four Wheel Drive Low To shift from Four Wheel Drive Low to Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 5 km h with the transmission in N Neutral and the ignition in ON RUN The preferred method for shifting out of Four Wheel Drive Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Turn the knob to the Four Wheel Drive High
426. ns 6 Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position 7 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF 4 49 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four wheel drive vehicle from the rear 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions A CAUTION Shifting a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into N Neutral can cause the vehicle to roll even 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly if the transmission is in P Park The driver or 3 Firmly set the parking brake See Parking Brake on others could be injured Make sure the parking page 2 42 brake is firmly set before the transfer case is 4 Put the transmission in P Park shifted to N Neutral 5 Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the m manufacturer s instructions 7 Shift the transfer case to N Neutral See Shifting 6 Use an adequate clamping device designed for into T O utali ungen SOUS IH Aive QU towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked page 2 37 8 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF After towing see Shifting Out of N Neutral under Four Wheel Drive on page 2 37 into the straight position 4 50 Level Control Automatic Level Control The automatic level control rear suspension is available on light duty vehicles and comes as a part of the Autoride suspension if e
427. nt in Four Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive Low for extended periods of time While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight turns you may experience a vibration in the steering system The vehicle has StabiliTrak Shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low will turn Traction Control and StabiliTrak off See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 Front Axle The front axle engages and disengages automatically when you shift the transfer case Some delay for the axle to engage or disengage is normal Automatic Transfer Case The transfer case knob is located to the left of the instrument panel cluster Use this dial to shift into and out of four wheel drive You can choose among five driving settings Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service An indicator light will flash while shifting It will stay on when the shift is completed If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift it will return to the last chosen setting 2 37 2 1 Two Wheel Drive High This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations The front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive This setting also provides the best fuel economy AUTO Automatic Four Wheel Drive This settin
428. nterpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filling out a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 dr bbb org goauto This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program STEP THREE Canadian Owners In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no charge Mediation Arbitration Program General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party ar
429. nto the radio s front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack the front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this source through the vehicle speakers See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 125 for more information 3 95 In some vehicles depending on audio options the rear speakers can be muted when the RSA power is turned on See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 134 for more information Playing an MP3 CD R or CD RW Disc Radios with a Single CD or a Six Disc CD player have the capability of playing an MP3 CD R or CD RW disc For more information on how to play an MP3 CD R or CD RW disc see Using an MP3 in the index Playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc Radios with a CD and DVD player have the capability of playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc For more information on how to play an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc see Using an MP3 in the index CD Messages CHECK DISC Radios with a Single CD player or radios with a Six Disc player displays CHECK DISC and or ejects the CD if an error occurs Radios with a CD and DVD player could display other messages when an error occurs Optical Error The disc was inserted upside down 3 96 Disk Read Error A disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown format Player Error There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT problems It is v
430. o 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law It should be noted that the temperature grade for this tire is established for atire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment might need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced See your dealer retailer for proper diagnosis 5 82 Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer retailer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer retailer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset
431. o unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment have your dealer retailer do these jobs When you go to your dealer retailer for service trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts To purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 tells what should be checked when to check it and what can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 15 When the vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer retailer Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays service is required for the vehicle Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine par
432. o eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing in the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 4 DVD Eject Press and release this button to eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 44 Tune Turn this knob to select MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing K SEEK DI Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3 WMA file if more than five seconds have played If less than five seconds have played the previous MP3 WMA file plays Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 WMA file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple
433. o much if you have got other equipment already adding to the weight of your vehicle Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow plow on your vehicle Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles does not exceed the axle rating for each For the front axle if more cargo or passengers must be carried appropriate counter ballast must be installed rear of the rear axle Counter ballast must be properly secured so it will not move during driving Follow the snow plow manufacturer s recommendations regarding rear ballast Rear ballast may be required to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio even though the actual weight at the front axle may be less than the front axle rating The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assist you in determining the amount of rear ballast required to help make sure your snowplow vehicle combination does not exceed the GVW rating the front and rear axle ratings and the front and rear weight distribution ratio The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between your front Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR and the front axle weight of your vehicle with full fuel and passengers Basically it is the amount of weight you can add to your front axle before reaching your front GAWR The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification Tire label as shown T
434. o outboard air dam bolts 2 With a flat blade tool disengage the snaps 3 After the bolts are removed and the snaps are disengaged push forward on the air dam until it is free Notice Operating your vehicle for extended periods without the front fascia lower air dam installed can cause improper air flow to the engine Always be sure to replace the front fascia air dam when you are finished off road driving After off roading be sure to reinstall the air dam 1 Line up the snaps and push the air dam rearward to engage the snaps 2 Install the two outboard bolts Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road There are some important things to remember about Driving how to load your vehicle The heaviest things should be on the floor forward of the rear axle Put heavier items as far forward A CAUTION Bc Be sure the load is properly secured so things are not tossed around Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo a
435. o reception When this happens try reducing the treble on the radio FM Stereo FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Although the radio has a built in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference some static can occur especially around tall buildings or hills causing the sound to fade in and out 3 137 XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio If static is received while listening to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off Rear Side Window Antenna The AM FM antenna is located in the passenger rear side windows Make sure the inside surfaces of the rear side windows are not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surfaces are damaged they could interfere with radio
436. ol or press the pushbutton located under the stop or the play pause symbol tags displayed on the radio If the radio head is sourced to something other than DVD V press the DVD CD AUX button to make DVD V the active source To resume DVD playback press the B Ul button on the remote control or press the pushbutton located under the play pause symbol tag displayed on the radio The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control If the disc has been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice on the remote control the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc Ejecting a Disc Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc If a disc is ejected from the radio but not removed the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time The disc is stored in the radio The radio does not resume play of the disc automatically If the RSA system is sourced to the DVD the movie when reloaded into the DVD player begins to play again In case loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the DVD pas button more than five seconds to force the disc to eject DVD Radio Error Messages Player Error This message displays when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wr
437. ol backlight on The backlight automatically turns off after seven to ten seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on Sm Title Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD This function may vary for each disc 3 130 Main Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when using a DVD A V lt gt Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu lt a Enter Press this button to select the choice that is highlighted in any menu LJ Display Menu Press this button to adjust the brightness screen display mode normal full or zoom and display the language menu amp Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active Bl Stop Press this button to stop playing fast reversing or fast forwarding a DVD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD gt Play Pause Press this button to start playing a DVD Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause it Press it again to continue playing the DVD On some radios play may be slowed down by pressing the play pause button then pressing the fast forward button when th
438. omatic Climate Control System 3 25 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System 3 125 iz m 5 7 EDR Sireno EE 7 16 Electrical Equipment Add On Equipment sse 5 114 Electrical System Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 5 117 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 115 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 5 115 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 115 Underhood Fuse Block sesssss 5 118 Windshield Wiper Fuses sssesse 5 115 Electronic Immobilizer PASS Key Ille cccccccceseseseeccceeeeeeessaaaaeeeees 2 22 Electronic Immobilizer Operation WS CM EE 2 23 Engine Air Cleaner Filter eese 5 19 Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp 3 44 Compartment Overview seee 5 14 Coolant m 5 29 Coolant Heater sss 2 28 Coolant Temperature Gage ssss 3 43 Cooling System e riranna a E iE Re 5 28 Drive Belt Routing seeeeeeeeee 6 16 dirum 2 46 Fan Noise serosoa eiee a nE E 5 37 Gp a e staal O E EN 5 15 IDEE 5 18 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 5 37 Overheating 3 sieneen aeania 5 34 Starting ME ean EE E E EEEE ETE 2 26 Entry Lighting eoi eo rere tote ree ERIS 3 19 Event Data Recorders ssssssssusussss 7 17 EXIT EIQ aiee oea icone N 3 19 Extender
439. on This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed the emergency button is pressed or if the airbags or AACN system deploy This information usually includes the vehicle s GPS location and in the event of a crash additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle was involved in e g the direction from which the vehicle was hit When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling is used the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle s GPS location so they can provide services where it is located OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area OnStar service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area has coverage network capacity and reception when the service is needed and technology that is compatible with the OnStar service Not all services are available everywhere particularly in remote or enclosed areas or at all times Location information about the vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available The vehicle must have a working electrical system including adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service at any particular time or p
440. ong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message displays if no disc is present when the amp or DVD CD AUX button is pressed on the radio Using the Auxiliary Input Jack The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate This is not an audio output do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack An external audio device such as an iPod laptop computer MP3 player CD player or cassette tape player etc can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another audio source Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P Park See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 for more information on driver distraction To use a portable audio player connect a 3 5 mm 1 8 inch cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack When a device is connected press the radio CD AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers For optimal sound quality increase the portable audio device s volume to the loudest level It is always best to power the portable audio device through its own battery while playing D Power Volume Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player Additional volume adjustments might have to be made from the portable device if the vol
441. ons on how to program RKE transmitters to the vehicle Battery Replacement Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC See REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 for additional information Notice When replacing the battery do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter Static from your body could damage the transmitter To replace the battery 1 Separate the transmitter with a flat thin object inserted into the notch on the side 2 Remove the old battery Do not use a metal object 3 Insert the new battery positive side facing down Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery 4 Snap the transmitter back together Remote Vehicle Start Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature This feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle It may also start up the vehicle s heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the ON RUN position If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system the climate control system will default to a heating or cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off During a remote start if your vehicle has an automatic
442. or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light CAUTION Continued 5 46 A CAUTION Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one
443. or other electronic device To turn off the warning light and or chime remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt Airbag Readiness Light The system checks the airbag s electrical system for possible malfunctions If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensor the pretensioners the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 1 81 The airbag readiness light flashes for a few seconds when the engine is started If the light does not come on then have it fixed immediately ZN CAUTION If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving it means the airbag system might not be working properly The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury have the vehicle serviced right away If there is a problem with the airbag system an airbag Driver Information Center DIC message can also come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 for more information 3 37 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator The vehicle has the passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 90 for important safety information The overhead console has a passenger airbag status indicator PASSENGER AIRBAG 1 OF
444. orn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 45 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly ZN CAUTION Never do this Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt The safety belt can not properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time 1 55 A CAUTION Never do this Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury The child might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest 1 56 Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This incl
445. otice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer retailer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s retailer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer retailer
446. ottom of the fill plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug When to Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to change the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired 5 52 How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface 1500 Series A Fill Plug B Drain Plug All except 1500 Series Fill Plug Drain Plug When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level from 0 0 mm to 1 8 inch 3 2 mm below the filler plug hole When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Headlamp Aiming The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system The aim of the headlamps have been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustm
447. ough an automatic car wash with the wipers on can damage them Turn the wipers off when going through an automatic car wash Windshield Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision S Washer Fluid Push the paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the windshield The wipers clear the window and then either stop or return to the preset speed Heated Windshield Washer For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid System it can be used to help clear ice snow tree sap or bugs from the windshield v Heated Washer Fluid Press the heated washer fluid button to activate the heated windshield washer fluid system This activation initiates four heated wash wipe cycles The first heated wash wipe cycle may take up to 40 seconds to occur depending on outside temperature After the first wash wipe cycle it may take up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to begin Press the button again to turn off the heated windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed When the heated windshield washer fluid system is activated under certain outside temperature conditions steam may flow out of the washer nozzles for a short period of time before washer fluid is spr
448. ounts press the SET button on the steering wheel briefly Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle s speed When going downhill you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle s speed down When the brakes are applied the cruise control turns off Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal Press the 53 button on the steering wheel Press the button on the steering wheel Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed memory is erased when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel It controls the following systems Headlamps Taillamps Parking Lamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights The exterior lamps control has four positions D Off Turns off the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps DRL Turning
449. our vehicle has roof rail airbags for the driver right front passenger and second row outboard passengers they are in the ceiling above the side windows Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar If your vehicle has roof rail airbags and a third row passenger seat the airbags are located in the ceiling above the rear windows for the outboard passenger positions in the third row ZN CAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating roof rail airbag will be blocked 1 85 When Should an Airbag Inflate Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver s or right front passenger s head and chest However they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflat
450. out of P Park unless the ignition is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage less than 9 volt battery If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage try charging or jump starting the battery See Jump Starting on page 5 44 for more information 2 45 To shift out of P Park use the following 1 Apply the brake pedal 2 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still are unable to shift out of P Park 1 Ease the pressure on the shift lever 2 While holding down the brake pedal press the shift lever all the way into P Park 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you are still having a problem shifting then have the vehicle serviced soon Parking Over Things That Burn A CAUTION Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn 2 46 Engine Exhaust A CAUTION Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death Exhaust may enter the vehicle if The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation parking garages tunnels deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different Th
451. ow Haul indicator light will come on The Tow Haul mode works with the Autoride feature if the vehicle has this to enhance the ride when trailering or with a loaded vehicle See Autoride on _ aa a a page 4 51 The vehicle has a Tow Haul mode The selector button is located on the end of the column shift lever You can use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load or if there is a need to charge a battery installed in a trailer See Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for more information 2 35 Grade Braking Hydra Matic 6 Speed Automatic Transmission The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever While in Range Selection Mode Grade Braking is deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range of gears Grade Braking is only active while the Tow Haul Mode is selected and you are not in the Range Selection Mode See Tow Haul Mode listed previously and Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 29 for more information on the Range Selection Mode Grade Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades by automatically implementing a shift schedule that utilizes the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle This reduces wear on the braking system and increases control of the vehicle Grade Braking monitors vehicle speed acceleration engine torque and brake pedal usage Using this information it detec
452. ow the transmission to cool This message clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position 3 73 WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir Also see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 39 for more information DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers All of the customization options may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then The customization preferences are automatically recalled To change customization preferences use the following procedure 3 74 Entering the Feature Settings Menu 1 Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle i
453. own on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure If the airbag is off the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit see If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint under Passenger Sensing System on page 1 90 for more information To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags A frontal airbag for the driver A frontal airbag for the right front passenger The vehicle may have the following airbags Aroof rail airbag for the driver and passenger directly behind the driver Aroof rail airbag for the right front passenger and the person seated directly behind that passenger e f your vehicle has a third row seat it will have a third row roof rail airbag All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening For frontal airbags the word AIRBAG will appea
454. page 5 34 for further information This message also displays when the vehicle s engine power is reduced Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this message is on but there is no reduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced Anytime this message stays on the vehicle should be taken to your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level is low Refuel as soon as possible See Fuel Gage on page 3 50 and Fuel on page 5 5 for more information HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFF This message displays when the heated windshield washer has been turned off See Windshield Washer on page 3 10 for more information HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES PENDING This message displays when the heated windshield washer system is heating the fluid See Windshield Washer on page 3 10 for more information HOOD OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the hood for obstructions and close the hood again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when ice conditions are possible LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN This messag
455. peration If in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W 30 engine oil Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures Always use an oil that meets the required specification GM6094M See What Kind of Engine Oil to Use for more information Engine Oil Additives Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly the system must be reset every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it indicates that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the oil
456. play if the stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions The message displays if an engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service See your dealer retailer The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted into 4LO The message turns off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present 3 72 TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message may display along with the check engine light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle s fuel cap is not tightened properly See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 44 Reinstall the fuel cap fully See Filling the Tank on page 5 9 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light and message off TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the TPMS is re learning the tire positions on your vehicle The tire positions must be re learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 76 Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 71 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 for more information TRACTION CONTROL OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this mes
457. position do the following 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor ZN CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 1 26 Folding and Tumbling the Second Row Seat s from the Third Row Seats or Outside A CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats if your vehicle has them do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 Press the automatic seat release button located on the panel behind the rear doors Driver s Side Rear Panel Button shown One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles t
458. pts for a name for the phone Use a name that best describes the phone This name will be used to indicate which phone is connected The system then confirms the name provided The system responds with lt Phone name gt has been successfully paired after the pairing process is complete Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to be paired 3 115 Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say List The system lists all the paired Bluetooth devices If a phone is connected to the vehicle the System will say Is connected after the connected phone Deleting a Paired Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Delete The system asks which phone to delete followed by a tone 4 Say the name of the phone to be deleted If the phone name is unknown use the List command for a list of all paired phones The system responds with Would you like to delete phone name Yes or No followed by a tone 5 Say Yes to delete the phone The system responds with OK deleting phone name gt 3 116 Linking to a Different Phone 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds
459. purts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven brake normally but do not pump the brakes If the brakes are pumped the pedal could get harder to push down If the engine stops there will still be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied Once the power assist is used up it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Antilock Brake System ABS This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away ABS checks itself A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on This is normal If there is a problem with ABS this warning light stays on See Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light on page 3 42 Along with ABS the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear Proportioning DRP system If th
460. pward A to the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it 5 Draw or tape a horizontal line B on the wall the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4 Notice Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut off when aiming Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build up which may cause damage to the headlamp 6 Turn on the low beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being adjusted This allows only the beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws which are under the hood near each headlamp assembly The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8 Torx socket Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam 5 55 Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 5 58 For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer retailer Halogen Bulbs A CAUTION Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and 9 Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line The lamp on the left A shows the correct headlamp aim The lamp on the right B shows the incorrect headlamp aim can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or
461. quipped This type of level control is fully automatic and will provide a better leveled riding position as well as better handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions An air compressor connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height The system is activated when the ignition key is turned to ON RUN and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter The system may exhaust lower vehicle height for up to ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned off You may hear the air compressor operating when the height is being adjusted If a weight distributing hitch is being used it is recommended to allow the shocks to inflate thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch Autoride With this feature improved vehicle ride and handling is provided under a variety of passenger and loading conditions The system is fully automatic and uses a computer controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed wheel to body position lift dive and steering position of the vehicle The controller then sends signals to each shock absorber to independently adjust the damping level to provide the optimum vehicle ride Autoride also interacts with the tow haul mode that when activated will provide additional control of the shock absorbers This additional control results in better ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is loaded or towing a
462. quipped on slippery surfaces 4 29 Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby If possible use the Hoadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 e Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror A CAUTION Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle This may cause exhaust gases to get inside Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle is stuck in the snow Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there CAUTION Continued 4 30 CAUTION Continued Open a window about two inches 5 cm on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 46 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you
463. r ioc ing levees 2 75 Lumbar Manual Controls ccccceseceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 1 6 Power Controls sees 1 6 Maintenance Footnotes sssssssssssssse m In me enne 6 7 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services ssss 6 6 At Each Fuel Fill eeeseeeeene 6 9 At Least Once a Month usus 6 10 At Least Once a Year ssesesesesenee 6 10 Maintenance Record c essen 6 17 Maintenance Schedule cont Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 15 Maintenance Requirements esses 6 2 Owner Checks and Services 6 9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 13 Scheduled Maintenance 6 4 UI E 6 3 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 Malfunction Indicator Lamp sseseese 3 44 Manual Lumbar Controls eeeeessssssse 1 6 Manual Seats metro EEEE opt Rer EAEN 1 4 Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals 1 8 Message DIC Warnings and Messages s 3 64 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview 2 48 Manual Rearview Mirror esses 2 48 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 2 51 Outside Convex Mirror eee 2 52 Outside Heated Mirrors
464. r Information Center DIC to indicate that URPA is off see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 for information about clearing the message When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary condition the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into R Reverse This occurs under the following conditions The driver disables the system The ultrasonic sensors are not clean Keep the vehicle s rear bumper free of mud dirt snow ice and slush For cleaning instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 110 Atrailer was attached to the vehicle or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of the liftgate during the last drive cycle the red light may illuminate in the rear display Once the attached object is removed URPA will return to normal operation Atow bar is attached to the vehicle The vehicle s bumper is damaged Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer to repair the system Other conditions may affect system performance such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck If the system is still disabled after driving forward at least 15 mph 25 km h take the vehicle to your dealer retailer Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA The vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system Read this entire section be
465. r is directed to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents In this mode the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode W Defrost The defrost mode is used to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly Air is directed to the windshield and side window vents with some directed to the floor vents In this mode the System automatically forces outside air into the vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode The air conditioning compressor runs automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is close to freezing Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear X Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning system on or off An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on The air conditioning can be selected in any mode as long as the fan switch is on On hot days open the windows to let hot inside air escape then close them This helps to reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down It also helps the System to operate more efficiently 3 23 The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so a small amount of water might drip under the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal Recirculation Press this
466. r on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger With roof rail airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim 1 81 Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts Even though today s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A CAUTION You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Also airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 86 Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person 1 82 ZN CAUTION Airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag as you would be
467. r vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down other wet weather driving tips include Allow extra following distance Pass with caution Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 5 61 Turn off cruise control Before Leaving on a Long Trip To prepare your vehicle for a long trip consider having it serviced by your dealer retailer before departing Things to check on your own include Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir full Windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades In good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids All levels checked Lamps Do they all work and are lenses clean Tires Are treads good Are tires inflated to recommended pressure Weather and Maps Safe to travel Have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving If you become tired or sleepy find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest Other driving tips include Keep the vehicle well ventilated Keep interior temperature cool Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often 4 27 Hill and
468. raint in different directions to be sure it is secure Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 66 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 66 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 73 If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 64 The vehicle s lap shoulder belts for the
469. rake fluid is spilled on the vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 110 5 41 Brake Wear This vehicle has disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving except when applying the brake pedal firmly A CAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When the brake wear warning sound is heard have the vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes 5 42 Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 5 122 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal trave
470. ransmission Temperature Press the trip fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C Blank Display This display shows no information Vehicle Information Menu Items i Vehicle Information Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Oil Life Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 You should change the oil as soon as you can See Engine Oil on page 5 15 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset
471. rating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create full power If there is a problem with the battery charging system this light will come on or the SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM DIC message will display See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 and Charging System Light on page 3 39 for more information Brake System Warning Light With the ignition on the brake system warning light comes on when the parking brake is set If the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged a chime sounds when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop the vehicle For good braking both parts need to be working well If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there could be a brake problem Have the brake system inspected right away This light can also come on due to low brake fluid See Brakes on page 5 40 for more information Qa D United States Canada This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to ON RUN If it does not come on then have it fixed so it is ready to warn if there is a problem A CAUTION The br
472. re Eight rere eine 3 48 Security Eight 1 iretur oet e aae 3 48 Fog Lamp Light deret ntt ns 3 49 Cruise Control Light sees 3 49 Highbeam On Light ssseeeeseeeseesssss 3 49 Tow Haul Mode Light seeeeesessse 3 49 BEC M m 3 50 Low Fuel Warning Light esssseessss 3 51 Driver Information Center DIC 3 51 DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons em 3 52 DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons ssseesssse 3 57 DIG Comipass 52 cueste cetera ttn snm ve ira inae 3 61 DIC Warnings and Messages sss 3 64 DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons neces 3 74 Instrument Panel Audio System s sssssseee 3 83 Setting the Clock seeeesseeeeese 3 84 Radio S ese aa t D EUN LER 3 86 Using an MP3 Radio with CD or Six Disc CD Player sseeesess 3 102 Using an MP3 Radio with CD and DVD Player ctctieere rite rne neinni 3 107 XM Radio Messages ess 3 113 Navigation Radio System 3 114 Bluetooth oerte esee ees 3 114 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System 3 125 Rear Seat Audio RSA a s 3 134 Theft Deterrent Feature esses 3 136 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 3 136 Radio Reception 1 eene 3 137 Rear Side Window An
473. rea not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible You will find other important information under Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 and Tires on page 5 61 Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns We recognize these concerns and urge every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving and obey all posted regulations Avoid any driving practice that could damage shrubs flowers trees or grasses or disturb wildlife This includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Check to see if there are any blocked or closed roads It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle in cas
474. rear axle now weighs 3 100 Ibs 1 406 kg 900 Ibs 408 kg can be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR The effect of tongue weight is about 1 5 times the actual weight Dividing the 900 Ibs 408 kg by 1 5 leaves only 600 Ibs 272 kg of tongue weight that can be handled Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight expect that the largest trailer the vehicle can properly handle is 6 000 Ibs 2 721 kg It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings GCWR GVWR RGAWR Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer 4 58 Total Weight on the Vehicle s Tires Be sure the vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires These numbers can be found on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Loading Your Vehicle for more information Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle or the GAWR including the weight of the trailer tongue If using a weight distributing hitch make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution spring bars Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches A Body to Ground Distance B F
475. rectly into approaching headlamps Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Keep your eyes moving especially during turns or curves No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old 4 25 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water A CAUTION Wet brakes can cause crashes They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car vehicle wash lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water 4 26 Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous Water can build up under your vehicle s tires so they actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When you
476. red Services on page 6 6 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 5 21 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealer retailer service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C Athigh speed for quite a while e n heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C 5 22 Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it is colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in 3 Third until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been
477. rences aseri 1 6 Retained Accessory RAP sees 2 26 CLIE RUE 1 5 Steering Eudora et etre ERES 5 38 linen 2 19 Power Assist Steps eseseseeeenee 2 17 Pregnancy Using Safety Belts 1 52 unco ce dear 7 16 Navigation System sse 7 18 enr CES 7 18 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 7 18 Program Courtesy Transportation sesssess 7 10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Proposition 65 Warning California 5 4 R Radio Frequency Identification RFID Le WC 7 18 sEtolWE MOM c 3 86 Radios Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual 3 114 RECEPTION eh cist nesutes ep bked emer Ree A 3 137 Setting the Clock ssa seinieni aiie 3 84 Theft Deterrent cccceeeeeececee eens ee eeeees 3 136 Rainsense Wipers esee 3 9 Reading Lamps 3 eee expeHts 3 20 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System 3 31 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls 3 33 Rear Axle 1 f cscs ccsisasescensncenecsnnghiesnttadnidiasacagices 5 49 MOCKING eC EE 4 9 Rear Door Security Locks sssssuss 2 11 Rear Heated Seats a se eenen 1 13 Rear Seat Armrest esssssssssssssese 2 76 11 Rear Seat Audio RSA System 3 1
478. rench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed 7 Place the bottom edge of the jack A on the wheel blocks B separating them so that the jack is balanced securely 5 99 9 Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire 8 Attach the jack handle extension and wheel wrench to the jack and place it with the wheel blocks under the vehicle toward the front of the rear bumper 10 Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting 5 100 11 12 Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable A CAUTION Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from under the spare 13 14 Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and carefully remove the jack Use one hand to push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand If the spare tire is hanging from the cable insert the hoist end of extension and wheel
479. ring and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid the wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin Remember StabiliTrak helps avoid only the acceleration skid See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 If the StabiliTrak System is off then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If the vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough the vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on s
480. rn signal before changing lanes When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone amber SBZA displays light up in the side mirrors This indicates that it may be unsafe to change lanes Before making a lane change always check the SBZA display check the outside and rearview mirrors look over your shoulder for vehicles and hazards and use the turn signal 2 56 SBZA Detection Zones The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 5 m This zone starts at each side mirror and goes back approximately 16 ft 5 0 m The height of the zone is approximately between 1 5 ft 0 5 m and 6 ft 2 0 m off the ground Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer as the SBZA detection zones do not change when a trailer is towed How the System Works Left Side Mirror Display Right Side Mirror Display When the vehicle is started both outside mirror displays will briefly come on to indicate that the system is operating When the vehicle is moving forward the left or right side mirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle is detected in that blind zone If the turn signal is activated and a vehicle is also detected on the same side the SBZA display will flash to give you extra warning not to change lanes SBZA displays do not come on while the vehicle is approaching or passing other vehicles At speeds greater then 20 mph 32 km h SBZA displ
481. rom running down Accessory Power Outlet s Accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone There are two under the climate controls one inside the center floor console one on the rear of the center floor console and one accessory power outlet in the rear cargo area on the passenger side To use an accessory power outlet remove the protective cap When not in use always cover the accessory power outlet with the protective cap The accessory power outlets are powered even with the ignition off Continuing to use accessory power outlets while the ignition is in LOCK OFF may cause the vehicle s battery to run down Notice f electrical devices are left plugged into a power outlet the battery may drain causing the vehicle not to start or damage to the battery This would not be covered by the warranty Always unplug all electrical devices when turning off the vehicle Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown adapter or vehicle fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer retailer for additional information on the accessory power plugs Notice Adding any electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your
482. rom the floor The seat will tumble forward Returning the Seat s to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position do the following 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 1 23 Folding and Tumbling the Seat s from the Third Row Seats ZN CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats if your vehicle has them 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 1 24 2 Lift the lever located on the bottom rear of the second row seat on the inboard side to release the s
483. ront of Vehicle When using a weight distributing hitch the hitch must be adjusted so the distance A remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle If a step bumper hitch will be used the bumper could be damaged in sharp turns Make sure there is ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper If the loaded trailer being pulled will weigh more than 5 000 Ibs 2 270 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving Always use a sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these limits Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer If the trailer being towed weighs up to the vehicle s trailer rating limit safety chains may be attached to the attaching point on the hitch platform Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground 4 59 Tow Haul Mode Pressing this button at the end of the shift lever turns on and off the tow haul mode This indicator l
484. roper usage The A V jacks are color coded to match typical home entertainment system equipment The yellow jack A is for the video input The white jack B is for the left audio input The red jack C is for the right audio input Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio system 3 127 To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded A V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on If the video screen is in the DVD player mode pressing the AUX auxiliary button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary See Radio s on page 3 86 for more information How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode normal full and zoom screen brightness and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu To change any feature 1 Press the L display menu button on the remote control 2 Use the remote control A v navigation arrows and the t enter button to use the setup menu 3 Press the L button again to remove the setup menu from the screen 3 128 Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be heard through the following possible sources Wireless Headphones Vehicle Speakers Vehicle wire
485. round wire For further information on roof mount emergency lamp installation please visit the GM Upfitter website at www gmupfitters com or contact your dealer If the vehicle has this button the vehicle may have the snow plow prep package For further information see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 4 40 Instrument Panel Brightness w EF Instrument Panel Brightness This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights and is located next to the exterior lamp control Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights Turning the knob to the farthest clockwise position turns on the dome lamps Dome Lamps The dome lamps come on when any door is opened They turn off after all the doors are closed The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the instrument panel brightness knob located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column clockwise to the farthest position In this position the dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or closed Dome Lamp Override The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control voco Dome Off Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened Entry Lighting The vehicle h
486. rs the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed Notice Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid Dual Automatic Climate Control System The heating cooling and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this system The vehicle also has a flow through ventilation system described later in this section If this vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information A Fan Control F Air Delivery Mode B AUTO Control C Defrost G Driver Temperature D Recirculation Control E REAR H Display Power Button L PASS J Rear Window M Passenger Defogger Temperature K Air Conditioning Control D On Off Press to turn the climate control system on or off Outside air still enters the vehicle and is directed to the floor This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button Recirculation can be selected once you have selected vent or bi level mode The temperature can also be adjusted using either temperature button If the air delivery mode or temperature settings are adjusted with the system off the display illuminates briefly to show the settings and
487. s 1 54 The manufacturer s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster Use a booster seat with a lap shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test Sit all the way back on the seat Do the knees bend at the seat edge If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Buckle the lap shoulder belt Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder If yes continue If no try using the rear safety belt comfort guide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 45 for more information If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder then return to the booster seat Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips touching the thighs If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for length of trip If yes continue If no return to the booster seat If you have the choice a child should sit in a position with a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash It should never be w
488. s do not use tire chains They can damage your vehicle because there is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions CAUTION Continued 5 84 CAUTION Continued To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle and do not spin your vehicle s wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires Notice f your vehicle has P265 70R17 size tires use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use chains that are the proper size for your vehicle s tires Install them on the rear tires only Do not use chains on the front tires Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle If a Tire Goes Flat
489. s determined by the direction of the roll 1 87 What Makes an Airbag Inflate In a deployment event the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag module Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with roof rail airbags there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows that have occupant seating positions How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually Roof rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body 1 88 Rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first second and third rows if equipped with a third row seat The rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help reduce the ris
490. s from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the light truck LT Metric tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide 5 66 D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Load Range Load Range G Service Description The service description indicates the load index and speed rating of a tire If two numbers are given as in the example 120 116 then this represents the load index for single versus dual wheel usage single dual The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s
491. s of automotive applications such as airbag initiators seat belt pretensioners and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters may contain perchlorate materials Special handling may be necessary For additional information see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Doing Your Own Service Work If this vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information A CAUTION You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If the wrong fasteners are used parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If doing some of your own service work use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 This vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 96 Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed See Maintenance Record on page 6 17 Adding Equipment to the Outsi
492. s start the first key may be faulty See your dealer retailer who can service the PASS Key Ill to have a new key made In an emergency contact Roadside Assistance It is possible for the PASS Key IIl decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle The following procedure is for programming additional keys only If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate you must see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to have keys made and programmed to the system See your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key IIl to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system 2 23 To program the new additional key 1 Verify that the new key has a stamped on it 2 Insert the original already programmed key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer retailer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to the ON RUN position within five seconds of turning the ignition to the LOCK OFF position in Step 3 The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed If you lose or damage your PASS Key Ill key see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can
493. s the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename displays 3 109 Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 WMA In Either the DVD or CD Slot Insert a CD R or CD RW partway into either the top or bottom slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R or CD RW should begin playing Depending on the format of the disc a softkey menu appears and allows navigation of the disc The menu reads left to right as RDM Randomize song play order a Folder icon with left and right arrows to move up or down through available folders a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist available and a Music Navigator tag If a Playlist tag is shown toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey only or the menu as previously described If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD R or CD RW in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned back on the CD R starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number and song title displays 3 110 4 cp Eject Press and release this button t
494. s when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 125 for more information If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only through the remote control Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output Only one audio source can be heard through the speakers at a time An audio source is defined as DVD slot CD slot XM FM AM Front Auxiliary Jack or Rear Auxiliary Jack Press the b button to turn the radio on The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle speakers Front seat passengers can listen to the radio AM FM or XM by pressing the BAND button or the DVD CD AUX button to select CD slot DVD slot front or rear auxiliary input if available If a playback device is plugged i
495. sage displays when the Traction Control System TCS is turned off Adjust your driving accordingly See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 for more information TRAILER CONNECTED On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system this message displays briefly when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle This message clears itself after several seconds This message also clears if you acknowledge it After this message clears the TRAILER GAIN OUTPUT display appears in the DIC See TRAILER GAIN OUTPUT under DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 52 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 57 and Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for more information TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed This message displays along with a sound if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle Stop the vehicle and let it idle to all
496. satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance might be affected The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 44 If this occurs return to your authorized dealer retailer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing the emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to the fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if the vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors Also your dealer retailer has additives that will help correct and pr
497. senger sensing system for the right front passenger position The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead console when the vehicle is started PASSENGER AIRBAG 1 OFF ON 2 AN NIA United States Canada The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible during the system check If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance if equipped you may not see the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or OFF or the symbol for on or off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 38 1 90 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver airbag and the roof rail airbags if equipped are not affected by the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not According to accident statistics children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a chi
498. service PASS Key Ill to have a new key made Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle 2 24 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice The vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased Ignition Positions The ignition switch has four different positions To shift out of P Park the ignition must be in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must be applied A LOCK OFF This position locks the ignition It also locks the transmission on automatic transmission vehicles The key can be removed in LOCK OFF On
499. shifts too often See Tow Haul Mode Light on page 3 49 When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades the vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in P Park for a few minutes before turning the engine off If the overheat warning comes on see Engine Overheating on page 5 34 4 69 Parking on Hills 5 f the vehicle is four wheel drive be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in N Neutral AN CAUTION 6 Release the brake pedal A CAUTION Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous If something goes wrong the rig could start to move People can be injured and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged When possible always park the rig on a flat surface It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If the engine has been left running the vehicle can If parking the rig on a hill move suddenly You or others could be injured To 1 Press the brake pedal but do not shift into P Park E Pra mm Pai M ed m yet Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
500. sion on page 5 24 Remote Negative Terminal Out of View See Jump Starting on page 5 44 Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 15 Engine Cooling Fan See Cooling System on page 5 28 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 38 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 40 L Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 118 M Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 39 Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If this is not done the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick add at least one quart liter of the recommended oil This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capa
501. snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide Meaning you can lose control of the vehicle See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Braking If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 40 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time Actually doing it is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in s
502. splay screen button 4 Select the Rear Camera Options screen button The Rear Camera Options screen will display 5 Touch the Symbols screen button The screen button will be highlighted when on Rear Vision Camera Error Messages Service Rear Vision Camera System This message can display when the system is not receiving information it requires from other vehicle systems If any other problem occurs or if a problem persists see your dealer retailer 2 61 Rear Vision Camera Location The image is provided by the camera located above the license plate The camera uses a special lens The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance The area displayed by the camera is limited The camera does not display objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper The area displayed on the screen can vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides 2 62 C ae i Corners of Bumper When the System Does Not Seem To Work Properly The rear vision camera system might not work properly or display a clear image if The RVC is turned off See Turning the Rear Camera System On or Off earlier in this section Itis dark The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens Ice snow mud or anything else builds up on
503. ss the button with the cooled seat symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the cooled seat off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of cooling selected three for high two for medium and one for low f Heated Seatback To heat only the seatback press the button with the heated seatback symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seatback off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low 3f Heated Seat and Seatback To heat the entire seat press the button with the heated seat and seatback symbol 1 8 This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seat off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated and cooled seats will be canceled after the ignition is turned off To use the heated and cooled seat feature after the vehicle is started you will need to press the appropriate seat but
504. ss and hold amp 4 for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Digit Dial The system responds with Digit dial using phone name please say the first digit to dial followed by a tone Say the digit to be dialed one at a time Following each digit the system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be dialed is complete After the whole number has been entered say Dial The system responds with OK Dialing and dials the number If an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the System say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them Using the Call Command 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Call The system responds with Call using phone name gt Please say the name tag followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag of the person to call If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK calling lt name tag gt and dials the number If the system is unsure it recognizes the right name tag it confirms the name tag followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK calling lt name tag gt and dials the number If the name tag is not correct say No
505. ss this button to turn ON OFF subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc 3 131 AUX Auxiliary Press this button to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source m Camera Press this button to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or track number selection Q Clear Press this button within three seconds after entering a numeric selection to clear all numerical inputs Z 10 Double Digit Entries Press this button to select chapter or track numbers greater than nine Press this button before entering the number If the remote control becomes lost or damaged a new universal remote control can be purchased If this happens make sure the universal remote control uses a code set of Toshiba 3 132 Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries 1 Slide the rear cover back on to the remote control 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery cover If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry p
506. ssible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service If the vehicle has the 6 2L V8 engine VIN Code 2 use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher You can also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher but the vehicle s acceleration could be slightly reduced and you might notice a slight audible knocking noise commonly referred to as spark knock If the octane is less than 87 you might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible Otherwise you could damage the engine If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 or 3 511 in Canada Some gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 5 6 for additional information California Fuel If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards the vehicle will operate
507. st pull the loop at the top of the armrest down to access the cupholders 2 76 Cargo Cover A CAUTION An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver Someone could be injured If the cover is removed always store it in the proper storage location When it is replaced always be sure that it is securely reattached To use the cover for vehicles that have it 1 Pull the cover handle toward the rear of the vehicle 2 Latch the cover posts into the retaining sockets on the cargo area trim panels To return the cover to the retracted position 1 Pull up on the cover handle to release the cover posts from the retaining sockets 2 Let the cover move forward to the full retracted position To remove the cover from a regular wheelbase model 1 Let the cover go all the way into the holder 2 Then grasping the driver s side cover end cap push the cover end cap toward the passenger side of the vehicle 3 Swing the cover rearward and take it out of the vehicle To put the cover in the vehicle 1 Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces rearward with the round surface facing down 2 Then hold the cover at an angle and place the cover end cap into the slot in the passenger side trim panel 3 Move the other end of the cover forward and hold it next to the driver s side trim panel slot 4 Press the end caps in to allow the cover to fit
508. stem parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Before checking the fluid level prepare the vehicle as follows 1 Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level surface Keep the engine running 2 Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in P Park With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then move the shift lever back to P Park Allow the engine to idle 500 800 rpm for at least one minute Slowly release the brake pedal Keep the engine running and press the Trip Fuel button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP Transmission Temperature displays on the Driver Information Center DIC Using the TRANS TEMP reading determine and perform the appropriate check procedure If the TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required temperature ranges allow the vehicle to cool or operate the vehicle until the appropriate transmission fluid temperature is reached 5 25 Cold Check Procedure Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until a hot check procedure can be made The hot check procedure is the most accurate method to check the fluid level Perform the hot check procedure at the first opportunity Use this cold ch
509. system is fully functional only when the ignition is in ON or in RUN The ITBC system can only be used with trailers with electric brakes A CAUTION Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBC system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking There may be an increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury or damage to the vehicle trailer or other property An aftermarket controller may be available for use with trailers with surge air or electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems To determine the type of brakes on the trailer and the availability of controllers check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer retailer 4 62 When trailering make sure of the following The ITBC system is used only with trailers that are equipped with electric brakes All applicable local and federal laws and regulations are followed All electrical and mechanical connections to the trailer are made correctly The trailer s brakes are in proper working condition The trailer and vehicle are properly loaded for the towing condition The ITBC system is a factory installed item Out of factory installation of this system should not be attempted GM is not responsible for warranty or performance of the system resulting from out of factory installation Trailer Brake Control Panel A Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever B Trailer Gain Ad
510. t Front Axle 2500 Series Vehicles with Four Wheel Drive Rear Axle Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Front Axle Propshaft Spline or One Piece Propshaft Spline Two Wheel Drive with Auto Trans SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 89021677 in Canada 89021678 meeting GM Specification 99861 15 SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 89021677 in Canada 89021678 meeting GM Specification 99861 15 DEXRONS VI Automatic Transmission Fluid Spline Lubricant Special Lubricant GM Part No U S 123458789 in Canada 10953511 or lubricant meeting requirements of GM 9985830 Usage Fluid Lubricant Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Hood Hinges GM Part No U S 12346241 41 in Canada 10953474 Outer Tailgate Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Handle Pivot GM Part No U S 123462 Points in Canada 10953474 Weatherstrip Lubricant GM Part No U S 3634770 in Canada 10953518 or Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No U S 12345579 in Canada 992887 Synthetic Grease with Teflon Superlube GM Part No U S 12371287 in Canada 10953437 Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Squeaks Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Maintenance Replacement Parts GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner Filter Standar
511. t il Play Pause Press either the play or pause icon displayed on the radio system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on the display the system is in pause mode If the pause icon is showing on the display the system is in playback mode 3 99 lt Group P Press to cycle through musical groupings on the DVD A disc Nav Navigate Press to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus 2 Audio Stream Press to cycle through audio stream formats located on the DVD A disc The video screen shows the audio stream changing Inserting a Disc To play a disc gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot The DVD player might not accept some paper labeled media The player starts loading the disc into the system and shows Loading Disc on the radio display At the same time the radio displays a softkey menu of option s Some discs automatically play the movie while others default to the softkey menu display which requires the radio s Play Enter or Navigation softkeys to be pressed The rear seat passenger can also start the disc with the remote control Loading a disc into the system depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD 3 100 Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system press the Bill button on the remote contr
512. t CD R s or CD RW s To eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing press and release this button A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing For the Six Disc CD player press and hold this button for two seconds to eject all discs 44 Tune Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the CD R currently playing K SEEK P Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3 file if more than ten seconds have played Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD lt 4 Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder 3 105 C3 Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file Sound will be heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays bb FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file Sound will be heard at
513. t device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays Using an MP3 Radio with CD and DVD Player MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 WMA files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio CDA and ignores the MP3 WMA files on the DVD deck On the CD deck press the CAT category button to toggle between compressed and uncompressed audio format the default being the uncompressed format CDA 3 107 MP3 WMA Format Burning an MP3 WMA disc on a personal computer Make sure the MP3 WMA files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc Do not mix standard audio and MP3 WMA files on one disc The CD player lower slot is able to read and play a maximum combination of 512 files and folders The DVD player upper slot is able to read 255 folders 15 playlists and 40 sessions Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can support up to eight subfolders deep however keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback
514. t disabled and the liftgate still will not function your vehicle should be taken to a dealer retailer for service Power Assist Steps The switch used to disable the power assist steps is Your vehicle may have power assist steps located on the center console below the climate The power assist steps automatically extend from E control system beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door has been opened Once the door is closed the assist steps automatically move back under the vehicle after a C brief delay The vehicle must not be moving for the assist steps to extend or retract The assist steps cannot be disabled in the extended position Windows ZN CAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a f vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous om They can be overcome by the extreme heat and it AUT pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather HON A ay suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat HU stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a P oy Y PA EN Power Windows A CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave
515. t may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt Free Falling Latch Plate across you more slowly 1 45 If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt with a free falling latch plate is pulled out all the way the child restraint locking feature may be engaged If this happens let the belt go back all the way and start again Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the right front seating position may affect the passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 90 for more information If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle for lap shoulder belts with cinching latch plates tilt the latch plate and keep pulling the safety belt until it can be buckled 1 46 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle see if you are using the correct buckle Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 53 Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 4 If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster move it to the height that is right for you See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information To unlatch the belt push the but
516. t no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured If there has been an injury call emergency services for help Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the crash Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the crash This will help guard against post crash legal action If you need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 for more information If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle Gather the important information you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle If possible call your insurance company from the sce
517. t regulates when the automatic headlamps turn on Do not cover the sensor or the headlamps will come on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system is only affected when the light sensor detects a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay If the vehicle is started in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once the vehicle leaves the garage it takes approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is bright enough outside During that delay the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position See nstrument Panel Brightness on page 3 19 To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off turn the control to the off position The headlamps will also stay on after you exit the vehicle This feature can be programmed using the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 The regular headlamp system can be turned on when needed
518. taining proper fluid level If readings are still inconsistent contact your dealer retailer Cooling System If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature 5 28 Lj ANAANAANANAA p T L A a RS i 5 3L Engine shown 4 8L 6 0L and 6 2L Engine similar Coolant Surge Tank Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Engine Cooling Fan s A CAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan ZN CAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL can cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 50 000 km 30 000 miles or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in the vehicle Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX C
519. tch is set between the up and down position write Middle The switch settings written down in Step 2 now become the button strokes to be entered into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4 Be sure to enter the switch settings written down in Step 2 in order from left to right into the Universal Home Neutral Off Remote when completing Step 4 3 From inside your vehicle first firmly press all three Middle Right Oo buttons at the same time for about three seconds 4 The indicator lights will blink slowly Enter each Release the buttons to put the Universal Home switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle s one half minutes to complete Step 4 Now press one button on the Universal Home Remote for each switch setting as follows f you wrote Left press the left button in the vehicle f you wrote Right press the right button in the vehicle f you wrote Middle press the middle button in the vehicle 2 72 5 After entering all of the switch positions again firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time The indicator lights will turn on 6 Press and hold the button that will be used to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink This button may need to be held for up to 55 seconds 7 Immediately release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is
520. tect vehicles in your blind zone The sensor may be blocked by mud dirt snow ice or slush This message may also display during heavy rain or due to road spray It may also come on when driving in isolated areas with no guardrails trees or road signs and light traffic Your vehicle does not need service For cleaning instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 110 See Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA on page 2 55 for more information STABILITRAK OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak or when the stability control has been automatically disabled To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system you should normally leave StabiliTrak on However you should turn StabiliTrak off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it or if you are driving in extreme off road conditions and require more wheel spin See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 31 To turn the StabiliTrak system on or off see StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 3 71 There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear One condition is overheating which could occur if StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended period of time The message also displays if the brake system warning light is on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 40 e The message could dis
521. teering accelerating and braking Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it is very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if the vehicle does get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause it to slide out of control A CAUTION Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only 4 23 Driving in Water A CAUTION Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it is only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Do not drive through rushing water Heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before driving through it Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe you probably will not get through Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts 4 24 If the water is not too deep drive slowly through it At faster speeds water
522. tenna 3 138 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 138 4 NOTES 3 3 Instrument Panel Overview United States version shown Canada similar 3 4 The main components of the instrument panel are the following A Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 7 Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3 35 Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 Shift Lever See Automatic Transmission Operation a E OG n mooc A Outlet Adjustment on page 3 31 on page 2 29 Tow Haul Mode on page 2 35 If Equipped Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 51 Audio System s on page 3 83 Exterior Lamps on page 3 15 Dome Lamp Override on page 3 19 Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 19 Fog Lamps on page 3 18 If Equipped Hood Release on page 5 13 Integrated Trailer Brake Controller If Equipped Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 Automatic Transfer Case Control If Equipped See Four Wheel Drive on page 2 37 N n Cruise Control on page 3 12 O Tilt Wheel on page 3 6 P Horn on page 3 6 Q R Climate Control System on page 3 22 or Dual Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 136 Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 25 If Equipped Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 21 Cigarette Lighter If Equipped See Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter on page 3 22 StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 If Equipped Pedal Ad
523. ter in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry The speed rating S speed a tire is certified to carry a load 5 65 LT245 75R16 E120 116S HI Light Truck LT Metric Tire A B C D A Light Truck LT Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeter
524. terior surface e A stiff brush It can cause damage to the vehicle s interior surfaces Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Use only mild neutral pH soaps Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery Organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc that can damage the vehicle s interior 5 107 Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For any soil always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning us
525. th When the vehicle is started and begins to move the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure there are no problems The system may be heard or felt while it is working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph 32 km h In some cases it may take approximately two miles of driving before the system initializes If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates the cruise control automatically disengages The cruise control can be re engaged when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 3 12 If the system fails to turn on or activate the StabiliTrak light along with one of the following messages will be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC TRACTION CONTROL OFF SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL STABILITRAK OFF SERVICE STABILITRAK If these DIC messages appear make sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off using the StabiliTrak on off button Then turn the steering wheel clockwise from the nine o clock position to the three o clock position If this clears the message s the vehicle does not need servicing If this does not clear the message s then turn the vehicle off wait 15 seconds and then turn it back on again to reset the system If any of these messages still appear on the Driver Information Center DIC the vehicle should be taken in for service For more information on the DIC mess
526. th the terrain and its many different features Surface Conditions Off roading surfaces can be hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle s steering acceleration and braking in different ways Depending on the surface slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances can occur Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Some things to consider e Is the path ahead clear Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead Does the travel take you uphill or downhill Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When driving over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands When driving over bumps rocks or other obstacles the wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking Off roading requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no ro
527. than two seconds again or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle 3 97 44 Tune Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD to manually tune a radio station or to change clock or date settings while in the clock or date setting mode See the information given earlier in this section specific to the radio CD and the DVD Also see Setting the Clock in the index for setting the clock and date ki SEEK Previous Track Chapter Press the left arrow to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press the left arrow again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews SEEK P Next Track Chapter Press the right arrow to go to the next track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews X REV Fast Reverse Press to quickly reverse the CD or DVD at five times the normal speed The radio displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse To stop fast reversing press again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 3 98 PP FWD Fast Forward Press to fast forward the CD or DVD The radio displays the elapsed time and fast forwards five times the normal speed To stop fast forwarding press again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews A Ej
528. the buckle nearest you Q What is wrong with this A The belt is over an armrest A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen not on the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests 1 41 Q What is wrong with this ZN CAUTION You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest A The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 42 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury You might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen
529. the storage tray which is located on the driver side trim panel over the rear wheelhouse 2 Remove the wing nut B used to retain the tool bag by turning it counterclockwise 3 Turn the knob A on the jack counterclockwise to release the jack and wheel blocks from the bracket Regular Wheelbase shown Extended Wheelbase 4 Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block similar retainer by turning the wing nut C counterclockwise 1 Remove the tray to access the tools by pulling up on the finger depression under the jack symbol 5 87 and instructions The tools you will be using include the following A Jack D Jack Handle B Wheel Blocks Extensions C Jack Handle E Wheel Wrench Hoist Assembly Hoist Shaft Hoist Shaft Access Cover Hole Jack Handle Extensions Wheel Wrench Hoist Cable OW gt g n m 5 88 To access the spare tire refer to the following graphics Tire Wheel Retainer Spare Tire Valve Stem Pointed Down Hoist Shaft Access Hole Hoist End of Extension Tool Spare Tire Lock 1 Open the hoist shaft access door C on the bumper to access the spare tire lock K 2 To remove the spare tire lock insert the ignition key turn it clockwise and then pull it straight out 3 Assemble the two jack handle extensions D and wheel wrench E as shown 4 Insert the open end of the extension J through the hole in the rear bumper I hoist shaft acc
530. the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure Using the DIC tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 52 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 57 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire s are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information label attached to your vehicle shows the size of your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle Also see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 Your vehicle s TPMS can warn you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 76 and Tires on page 5 61 Notice Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors Sensor damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered by your warranty Do not use liquid tire sealants 5 73 TPMS Malfunction Light and Messa
531. the vehicle Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the road tires originally installed on your vehicle This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle So it is all right to drive on it If your vehicle has four wheel drive and the different size spare tire is installed keep the vehicle in two wheel drive 5 106 After installing the spare tire on your vehicle you should Stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle This way the spare tire will be available in case you need it again Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes because they will not fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your vehicle s original road tires and wheels in size and type do not include the spare in the tire rotation Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible The vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat t
532. then returns to off The system can be turned back on by pressing either amp 4 the defrost or the AUTO button 3 25 Driver and Passenger Side Temperature Control The driver and passenger side temperature buttons are used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver or passenger s side of the vehicle The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air always flows through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature The driver side or passenger side temperature display shows the temperature setting decreasing or increasing The passenger s temperature setting can be set to match the driver s temperature setting by pressing the PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator When the passenger s temperature setting is set different than the driver s setting the indicator on the PASS button illuminates and both the driver side and passenger side temperature displays are shown 3 26 Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic When automatic operation is active the system will control the inside temperature the air delivery and the fan speed Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode 1 Press the AUTO button When AUTO is selected the display
533. ther anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors 2 Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Second Row 60 40 1 67 Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors dli Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Second Row Bucket dli Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors HB Third Row Two Passenger ali Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors There is one top tether anchor that can be used for either the third row center or
534. till securely fastened f small heavy objects are placed on the roof cut a piece of 3 8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails and siderails to spread the load Tie the plywood to the siderail supports Tiethe load and secure it to the crossrails or the siderail supports Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding To move a crossrail lift the release lever up on both sides of the rail Then slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing the force side to side Press the release lever down on both sides of the rail down to tighten it Try to slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to make sure it is tight To carry long items move the crossrails as far apart as possible Tie the load to the crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports Also tie the load to the bumpers but do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged After moving a crossrail be sure it is securely locked into the siderail A Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL is located above the rear window glass Make sure items loaded on the roof of the vehicle do not block or damage the CHMSL 2 75 Rear Storage Area For vehicles with a rear storage area it is located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle on the driver s side trim panel Turn the knobs and swing the storage door to access the storage compartment The door can be removed Rear Seat Armrest For vehicle with a rear seat armre
535. times the player continues moving backward or forward through the MP3 WMA files on the CD lt a Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder lt 44 REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays PP FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays RDM Random With the random setting MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW can be listened to in random rather than sequential order To play MP3 WMA files from the CD R or CD RW in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play Music Navigator Use the music navigator feature to play MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It could take several minutes to scan
536. tion Control System TCS When this message displays the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly See your dealer retailer for service See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 for more information SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control ITBC system this message displays and a chime sounds when there is a problem with the ITBC system When this message displays power is no longer available to the trailer brakes As soon as it is safe to do so carefully pull your vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on If this message still displays either your vehicle or the trailer needs service See your dealer retailer See Integrated Trailer Brake Control System under Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for more information SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system this message displays when the SBZA system has been turned off See Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA on page 2 55 and DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 3 52 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 3 57 for more information SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS System UNAVAILABLE If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system this message displays when the SBZA system is disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot de
537. tm OUS t O14 9 D DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Light Truck LT Metric Tire Safety Standards E Tire Identification Number TIN The letters A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination and numbers following DOT code are the Tire of letters and numbers used to define a particular Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the tire s width height aspect ratio construction type manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the and service description See the Tire Size tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both illustration later in this section for more detail sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture 5 64 F Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread G Single Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single For information on recommended tire pressure see nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size P245 75R16 109S TUT B CDE Passenger P Metric Tire A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first charac
538. to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition You can program this feature using the Driver Information Center DIC See DELAY DOOR LOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 Programmable Automatic Door Locks Vehicles with an automatic lock unlock feature enable you to program the vehicle s power door locks You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 for more information on DIC programming Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle has rear door security locks These prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door The rear doors must be open to access them The label showing lock and unlock positions is located near the lock To set the locks do the following 1 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position 2 Close the door When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on do the following 1 Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock using the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entr
539. ton again Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals Your vehicle may have the memory package The controls for this feature are located on the driver s door panel and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver s seat outside mirrors and the adjustable throttle and brake pedal v To save seating positions in memory 1 Adjust the driver s seat including the seatback recliner and lumbar both outside mirrors and the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable position See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2 50 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2 27 for more information Not all mirrors adjustable throttles and brake pedals or power lumbar will have the ability to save and recall their positions 2 Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound to indicate that the position has been stored A second seating lumbar mirror and throttle and brake pedal position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2 To recall the memory positions the vehicle must be in PARK P Press and release either button 1 or button 2 corresponding to the desired driving position The seat outside mirrors and adjustable throttle and brake pedals will move to the position previously stored You will hear a single beep If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is on automatic seat adjustable mirror and adjustable pedal
540. ton on the buckle The belt should return to its stowed position Before a door is closed be sure the safety belt is out of the way If a door is slammed against a safety belt damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle 5 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants 1 47 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger positions Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder The belt should be away from the face and neck but not falling off the shoulder Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash Squeeze the buttons A on the sides of the height adjuster and move the height adjuster to the desired position The adjuster can be moved up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After the adjuster is set to the desired position try to move it down without squeezing the buttons to make sure it has locked into position 1 48 Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen they are part of the safety belt assembly They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
541. tral Shift the vehicle s transfer case to N Neutral only when towing the vehicle See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4 44 or Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 44 for more information If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays on you should take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service See SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 64 Shifting Into Four Wheel Drive High or AUTO Automatic Four Wheel Drive Turn the knob to the Four Wheel High or AUTO position This can be done at any speed except when shifting from Four Wheel Drive Low The indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain on when the shift is completed Shifting Into Two Wheel Drive High Turn the knob to the Two Wheel High position This can be done at any speed except when shifting from Four Wheel Drive Low See shifting out of Four Wheel Drive Low later in this section for more information Shifting Into Four Wheel Drive Low When Four Wheel Low is engaged vehicle speed should be kept below 45 mph 72 km h Extended high speed operation in 4L may damage or shorten the life of the drivetrain To shift to the Four Wheel Drive Low position the ignition must be in ON RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 5 km h with the transmission in N Neutral The preferred method for shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low is to have the vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Turn the k
542. ts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally service the vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required services are described in the following for Maintenance I and Maintenance II Generally it is recommended that the first service be Maintenance I the second service be Maintenance II and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter However in some cases Maintenance II may be required more often Maintenance I Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed Maintenance II Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I Always use Maintenance II whenever the message displays 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 5 15 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components See footnote ee eee Visually check for any leaks or dam
543. ts outside air v Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents In this mode the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode W Defrost This mode removes fog or frost from the windshield more quickly Air is directed to the windshield and side window vents with some directed to the floor vents In this mode the system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear 3 28 X Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning A C compressor on and off An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on If this button is pressed when the air conditioning compressor is unavailable the indicator flashes three times and then turns off If the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective the air conditioning light turns off to show that the air conditioning mode has been canceled On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This helps to reduce th
544. ts when the truck is on a downhill grade and the driver desires to slow the vehicle by pressing the brake Also see Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for more information 2 36 Cruise Grade Braking Hydra Matic 6 Speed Automatic Transmission Cruise Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill grade It maintains vehicle speed by automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle Cruise Grade Braking operates while Cruise Control is engaged in Tow Haul mode to assist in maintaining vehicle speed under loaded vehicle conditions It utilizes vehicle acceleration and deviation from desired speed to determine the correct gear for the operating condition If vehicle speed is above the desired speed the transmission will downshift to slow the vehicle If vehicle speed is near or below desired speed the trans will upshift allowing vehicle speed to increase While in the Range Select Mode RSM mode Cruise Grade Braking is not available See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 29 Four Wheel Drive If the vehicle has four wheel drive you can send the engine s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction Read the following before using four wheel drive Notice Driving on clean dry pavement in Four Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive Low for an extended period of time may cause premature wear on your vehicle s powertrain Do not drive on clean dry paveme
545. ttings of high medium and low and to turn it off Indicator bars next to the symbol will designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated seats are off when the ignition is off 60 40 Split Bench Seat Second Row If your vehicle has a 60 40 split bench the seat s can be folded for additional cargo space or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seats if your vehicle has them These seats will have either the manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic seat release fold and tumble feature Manual Fold and Tumble Feature Folding and Tumbling the Seat s To fold and tumble the seat do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat to release the seatback The seatback will fold forward automatically Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat load floor If the seatback cannot fold flat try moving the front seat forward and or put the front seatback in the upright position Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor The will tumble forward seat Returning th
546. tween the arrows Once all songs by that artist are played the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on the CD R or CD RW and begins playing MP3 files by that artist To listen to MP3 files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow button The next or previous artist in alphabetical order plays Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed To change from playback by artist to playback by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen Now the album name is displayed on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD R or CD RW and begins playing MP3 files from that album To exit music navigator mode press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD remains safely inside the radio for future listening CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio The CD icon and a message showing disc and or track number displays when a CD is in the player Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary inpu
547. ty in order to verify the cold check The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases so it is important to ensure the transmission temperature is within range 1 Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 14 for more information 2 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 3 Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 4 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading cool RHO 5 Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch band on the dipstick If the fluid level is not within the HOT band and the transmission temperature is between 160 F and 200 F 71 C and 93 C add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the HOT band If the fluid level is low add only enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5L Do not overfill 6 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 5 27 Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously Consistency repeatable readings is important to main
548. ty is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle See Towing a Trailer on page 4 52 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips 4 35 A 4 36 Example 1 Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 2 Available Occupant and Cargo Weight 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg 700 Ibs 317 kg Example 2 Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 5 Available Cargo 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 750 Ibs 136 kg 250 Ibs 113 kg Example 3 Item Description Vehicle Capacity A Weight for Example 3 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 0 Ibs 0 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs 91 kg x5 Available Cargo Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passen
549. udes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people or can be thrown out of the vehicle 1 57 A CAUTION Never do this Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle Due to crash forces an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash For example in a crash at only 40 km h 25 mph a 5 5 kg 12 Ib infant will suddenly become a 110 kg 240 Ib force ona person s arms An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint 1 58 ZN CAUTION Never do this
550. uetooth on page 3 114 in this manual for more information SRCE Source Voice Recognition Press to switch between the radio AM FM XM CD DVD if equipped front auxiliary if equipped and rear auxiliary if equipped For vehicles with the navigation system press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition See Voice Recognition in the Navigation System manual for more information X Volume Press to increase or to decrease the radio volume DI Seek Press to go to the next radio station while in AM FM or XM Press Dl to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot Press the DI if multiple discs are loaded to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD player Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radi
551. ume is not loud or soft enough BAND Press to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing The portable audio device also continues to play CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to play a CD when a portable audio device is playing Press again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays 3 101 DVD CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 125 for more information 3 102 Using an MP3 Radio with CD or Six Disc CD Player MP3 CD R or CD RW Disc The ra
552. ument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of the interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety belts It may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 5 10
553. ure allows you to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle s doors and liftgate will be delayed When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open this feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice See Delayed Locking on page 2 10 for more information Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle s doors ON default The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 77 EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside This happens after the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK OFF Press t
554. urer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 77 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 80 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Loa
555. ustomization With DIC Buttons on page 3 74 Reclining Seatbacks A CAUTION You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked A CAUTION Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Manual Reclining Seatbacks On seats with manual reclining seatbacks the lever used to operate them is located on the outboard side of the seat s To recline the seatback 1 Lift the recline lever 2 Move the seatback to
556. utton on the RKE transmitter HORN amp LIGHTS default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings LIGHTS OFF The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ON default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC DELAY DOOR LOCK This feat
557. utton or the DISP knob If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source 3 92 When the CD is inserted the CD symbol displays As each new track starts to play the track number displays The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner Playing a CD In Either the DVD or CD Slot Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing in 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and in 30 seconds for a DVD depending on media type and format ranges If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or by the RSA unit See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 134 for more information The DVD CD decks upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck of the radio are compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW and MP3s When a CD is inserted the text label DVD or CD symbol displays on the left side of the radio display As each new track starts to play the track number displays The CD player can play the s
558. vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system Read this entire section before using it A CAUTION The Rear Vision Camera RVC system does not replace driver vision RVC does not Detect objects that are outside the camera s field of view below the bumper or underneath the vehicle Detect children pedestrians bicyclists or pets Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the rear vision camera screen or use the screen during longer higher speed backing maneuvers or where there could be cross traffic Your judged distances using the screen will differ from actual distances So if you do not use proper care before backing up you could hit a vehicle child pedestrian bicyclist or pet resulting in vehicle damage injury or death Even though the vehicle has the RVC system always check carefully before backing up by checking behind and around the vehicle Vehicles Without Navigation System The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle When the key is in the ON RUN position and the driver shifts the vehicle into R Reverse the video image automatically appears on the inside rear view mirror Once the driver shifts out of R Reverse the video image automatically disappears from the inside rear view mirror Turning the Rear Vision Camera System Off or On To turn off the rear vision camera system press and hold located on th
559. vehicles with an automatic transmission the shift lever must be in P Park to turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center If this happens move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC ACCESSORY If this doesn t work then the vehicle needs service Notice Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key Use the correct key make sure it is all the way in and turn it only with your hand If the key cannot be turned by hand see your dealer retailer B ACC ACCESSORY This position lets things like the radio and the windshield wipers operate while the engine is off Use this position if the vehicle must be pushed or towed C ON RUN This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights The switch stays in this position when the engine is running The transmission is also unlocked in this position on automatic transmission vehicles If you leave the key in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position with the engine off the battery could be drained You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time D START This is the position that starts the engine When the engine starts release the key The ignition switch returns to ON RUN for driving A warning tone w
560. vel surface e For all 4 8L 5 3L 1500 series and all 6 2L all wheel drive 1500 series luxury model applications the proper level is from 0 04 inch to 0 75 inch 1 0 mm to 19 0 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level e For all 6 0L 1500 series and all 6 2L non all wheel drive 1500 series luxury model applications the proper level is from 0 6 inch to 1 6 inches 15 mm to 40 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level The proper fill level for the 2500 series is from 0 to 1 2 inch 0 to 13 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located at the front of the axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level Four Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles There are two additional systems that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant Active Transfer Case A Fill Plug B Drain Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug hole you will need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the b
561. vent the TPMS from functioning properly See Buying New Tires on page 5 78 Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition See your dealer retailer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you rotate your vehicle s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver side front tire passenger side front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your dealer retailer for service The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure If increasing the tire s air pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall To decrease air pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage or a key You have two minutes to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer than two minutes to match the
562. ving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 71 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle 5 79 Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this could affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti lock brakes rollover airbags traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected A CAUTION If you add d
563. wertrain warranty period Items considered are hotel meals and rental car Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance Impound towing caused by violation of any laws Legal fines Mounting dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non public road or highway Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles Fuel delivery Reimbursement is approximately 5 Canadian Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service Lock Out Service Vehicle registration is required Trip Routing Service Limit of six requests per year Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance Must be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was started to qualify General Motors of Canada Limited requires pre authorization original detailed receipts and a copy of the repair orders Once authorization has been received the Roadside Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements and explain how to receive payment Alternative Service If assistance cannot be provided right away the Roadside Assistance advisor may give you permission to get local emergency road service You will receive payment up to 100 after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance Mechanical failures may be covered however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility Scheduling
564. wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle 3 Turn the wiper blade assembly and pull it off of the wiper arm Hold the wiper arm in position and push the blade away from the wiper arm 5 60 Tires CAUTION Continued Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your vehicle Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your vehicle s tires are cold See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 70 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire s tread is badly worn or if your vehicle s tires have been damaged replace them A CAUTION Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous e Overloading your vehicle s tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 33 CAUTION Continued 20 Inch Tires
565. witches depending on the brand of transmitter The garage door opener receiver motor head unit could also have a row of dip switches that can be used when programming the Universal Home Remote If the total number of switches on the motor head and hand held transmitter are different or if the dip switch settings are different use the dip switch settings on the motor head unit to program the Universal Home Remote The motor head dip switch settings can also be used when the original hand held transmitter is not available Switch Number Switch Position Your Universal Home Remote Button Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions The panel of switches might not appear exactly as they do in the examples above but they should be similar The switch positions on the hand held transmitter could be labeled as follows A switch in the up position could be labeled as Up or On A switch in the down position could be labeled as Down or Off A switch in the middle position could be labeled as Middle 0 or Neutral 2 71 2 Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows When a switch is in the up position write Left When a switch is in the down position write Right e f a swi
566. wrench into the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of the way Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has been inspected and or replaced To continue changing the flat tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5 91 5 101 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier Refer to the following graphics and instructions to and Tools help you A CAUTION Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place Notice Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up can damage the wheel Always stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel tire repaired as soon as possible A Hoist Assembly H Spare Tire Flat B Hoist Shaft Tire Valve Stem C Hoist Shaft Access Pointed Down Cover Hole l Hoist Shaft D Jack Handle Access Hole Extensions J Hoist End of E Wheel Wrench Extension Too
567. xiliary source connected to A V jacks or the auxiliary input jack if the vehicle has this feature The wireless headphones have an On Off button channel 1 2 switch and a volume control If the vehicle has a third row video screen display it may have two additional headphones 3 126 Push the power button to turn on the headphones An indicator light located on the headphones comes on If the light comes on but there is intermittent sound and or static on the headphones or if the indicator light does not come on the batteries might need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section for more information Switch the headphones to Off when not in use Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the RSE overhead console The headphones shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes If you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle the headphones lose the audio signal The headphones automatically turn off after four hours of continuous use To adjust the volume on the headphones use the volume control located on the right side For optimal audio performance the headphones must be worn correctly Headphones should be worn with headband over the top of the head for best audio reception The symbol L Left appears on the upper left side above the ear pad and should be posit
568. y 7 16 Vehicle Data Recording Radio Frequency RFID restaren 7 18 Vehicle Identification Number VIN eere etam c te tenens 5 114 Service Parts Identification Label 5 114 Vehicle Remote Start cccccccee cece eeeeeeeeaees 2 7 Ventilation Adjustment seeeeeeeeeeeee 3 31 VISO Su chr a ccumactnnnees cnacan e 2 20 Voltmeter Gage sesem m 3 40 15 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 34 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 3 64 Hazard Warning Flashers sessssss 3 6 Safety and Symbols seisine nnii iiias iv Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance 5 82 Different SIZe eaten eo ere et oie nice 5 80 Replacement orrn een nar vaina rive 5 82 When It Is Time for New Tires ccecce 5 77 Where to Put the Child Restraint 1 64 WIMQOWS sc wedaceiacasadinaceanepssnedintateaasabieeesacnates 2 18 y Em 2 19 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades Cleaning 5 111 Rainsense Wipers ceeeeseseees 3 9 lucc E 3 10 16 Windshield cont Washer FIUIG onto agn nona 5 39 Wiper Blade Replacement 5 59 Wiper FUSES eR 5 115 WIPGIS cerits pancana aaa aE aE 3 9 Winter Driving 5 exon ur bie iadendriendniaiees 4 29 Wipers Rear Washer 4 iii trente e DES 3 11 XM Radio Messages
569. y RKE transmitter if the vehicle has one 2 Open the door from the outside To cancel the rear door security lock do the following 1 Unlock the door and open it from the outside 2 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door is open If the driver s side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver s door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock If the passenger s side power door lock switch is pressed when the front passenger s door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the front passenger s door will unlock Liftgate Liftglass A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the liftglass or liftgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the liftglass or liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftglass or liftgate Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the recirculation mode off That will force outside air into your vehicle See Climate Contro
570. y and could go out of control Never try to turn around if about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle it is steep enough to cause it to roll over If you cannot make it up the hill back straight down the hill A CAUTION Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P Park This is because the Neutral position on the transfer case overrides the transmission You or someone else could be injured If you are going to leave your vehicle set the parking brake and shift the transmission to P Park But do not shift the transfer case to Neutral If after stalling you try to back down the hill and decide you just cannot do it set the parking brake put your transmission in P Park and turn off the engine Leave the vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill Do not shift the transfer case to Neutral when you leave the vehicle Leave it in some gear 4 20 Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill consider How steep is the downhill Will be able to maintain vehicle control What is the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders What is at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide
571. y there To scan stations press and hold either arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds The radio goes toa station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press either arrow again to stop scanning The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band 3 88 i Information XM Satellite Radio Service MP3 and RDS Features Press to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time When the ignition is in the OFF position press 1 to display the time For vehicles with XM MP3 WMA or RDS features press Ito display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or CD MP3 or WMA song If information is available during XM CD MP3 or WMA playback the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line When information is not available NO INFO displays Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is stopped Tune to favorite stations using the presets favorites button and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 FAV Favorites A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button FAV button Press the FAV
572. you can go down a hill safely try to keep the vehicle headed straight down Use a low gear so engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping the vehicle under control at all times A CAUTION Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control Things not to do when driving down a hill e When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that is not too steep to drive down might be too steep to drive across The vehicle could roll over Never go downhill with the transmission in N Neutral called free wheeling The brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill but if it happens when going downhill Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and apply the parking brake Shift to P Park and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine will not start get out and get help 4 21 Driving Across an Incline An off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill To decide whether to try to drive across the incline consider the following A C
573. your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash 1 37 Q What is wrong with this m ZN CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give as much protection this way 1 38 Q What is wrong with this A The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs 1 39 Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle 1 40 A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not on the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into
574. zed service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 2 67 Universal Home Remote System Operation With Three Round LED This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System If there are three round Light Emitting Diode LED indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the instructions below This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home automation devices Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist with programming the transmitter 2 68 Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming Only the original remote control transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming The programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons later in this section Park the vehicle outside of the garage when programming a garage door Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being programmed Programming Universal Home Remot

2009 GMC Yukon Owners Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents